[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2005055808A2 - Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer - Google Patents

Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005055808A2
WO2005055808A2 PCT/US2004/040576 US2004040576W WO2005055808A2 WO 2005055808 A2 WO2005055808 A2 WO 2005055808A2 US 2004040576 W US2004040576 W US 2004040576W WO 2005055808 A2 WO2005055808 A2 WO 2005055808A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
gene
cells
antibody
sequences
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2004/040576
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2005055808A3 (en
Inventor
Bruce L. Roberts
Srinivas Shankara
Original Assignee
Genzyme Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Genzyme Corporation filed Critical Genzyme Corporation
Priority to JP2006542803A priority Critical patent/JP2007518399A/en
Priority to EP04812984A priority patent/EP1692318A4/en
Publication of WO2005055808A2 publication Critical patent/WO2005055808A2/en
Publication of WO2005055808A3 publication Critical patent/WO2005055808A3/en
Priority to US11/445,061 priority patent/US20070065889A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/574Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for cancer
    • G01N33/57407Specifically defined cancers
    • G01N33/57423Specifically defined cancers of lung
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6835Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site
    • A61K47/6851Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a determinant of a tumour cell
    • A61K47/6857Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a determinant of a tumour cell the tumour determinant being from lung cancer cell
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/04Immunostimulants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6876Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes
    • C12Q1/6883Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for diseases caused by alterations of genetic material
    • C12Q1/6886Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for diseases caused by alterations of genetic material for cancer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • G01N33/5011Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics for testing antineoplastic activity
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/136Screening for pharmacological compounds

Definitions

  • TECHNICAL FIELD This invention is in the field of cancer biology.
  • the present invention provides compositions and methods for identifying a neoplastic lung cell. It also provides compositions and methods to inhibit the growth, of neoplastic lung cells identified by these methods.
  • NSCLC non-small cell lung cancer
  • the primary tumor is generally responsive to chemotherapy, but is followed by wide-spread metastasis.
  • the median survival time at diagnosis is approximately 1 year, with a 5 year survival rate of 5%.
  • the present invention provides methods for aiding in the diagnosis of the condition of a lung cell, for identifying and/or distinguishing normal and neoplastic lung cells and for identifying potential therapeutic agents to induce cytolysis, apoptosis or death of and/or ameliorate the symptoms associated with the presence of neoplastic lung cells in a subject. Further provided are compositions and methods to induce cytolysis, apoptosis or death of neoplastic lung cells and/or ameliorate the symptoms associated with neoplastic lung cells in vivo.
  • one embodiment is a method for diagnosing the condition of a lung cell by screening for the presence of a differentially expressed gene isolated from a sample containing or suspected of containing a lung cell, in which the differential expression of the gene is indicative of the neoplastic state of the lung cell.
  • the gene is expressed more in a neoplastic squamous lung cell or a lung tumor cell as compared to normal lung cell, and is selected from Porimin, Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase, Receptor Type K ("PTPRTK”), GITR (a/k/a TNFRSF18), Lymphotoxin /3-Rece ⁇ tor (“LTjSR”), and Epithelial Membrane Protein 2 ("EMP2").
  • the gene is expressed more in a neoplastic adenocarcinoma lung cell or tumor.
  • the gene is selected from the group consisting of Lectin-like NK.
  • LNKR Longum NLR
  • 4Span4 a/k/a “MS4A8B”
  • Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase Receptor Type C a k/a "CD45”
  • TNFRSF14 Tumor Necrosis Factor Receptor Superfamily Member 14
  • TLR-2 Toll-Like Receptor 2
  • DKFZ DKF2P56400823
  • Detection can be by any appropriate method, including for example, detecting the quantity of mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of cDNA produced from the reverse transcription of the mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of the polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene. These methods can be performed on a sample by sample basis or modified for high throughput analysis. Additionally, databases containing quantitative full or partial transcripts or protein sequences isolated from a cell sample can be searched and analyzed for the presence and amount of transcript or expressed gene product. The methods are particularly useful for aiding in the diagnosis of squamous tumors or adenocarcinomas of the lung.
  • Another aspect of the invention is a screen to identify therapeutic agents that induce cytolysis, apoptosis or cell death or to treat lung neoplasia and tumors, wherein the lung cell and/or tumor is characterized by the differential expression of at least one gene identified in Table 1, below.
  • the method comprises contacting the cell previously identified as possessing this genotype with an effective amount of a potential agent and assaying for cytolysis or elimination of the cell.
  • Table 1A Over-Expressed in Squamous Tumors Lung Cancer Targets
  • kits for use in a diagnostic method or drug screen comprises at least one agent (e.g., probe, primer or antibody) that detects expression of at least one gene identified in Table 1 and instructions for use.
  • agent e.g., probe, primer or antibody
  • polynucleotides encoding the proteins, fragments thereof, or polypeptides, also referred to herein as gene expression product
  • gene delivery vehicles comprising these polynucleotides and host cells comprising these polynucleotides.
  • the proteins, polypeptides or fragments thereof are also useful to generate antibodies that specifically recognize and bind to these molecules.
  • the antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal. These antibodies can be used to isolate protein or polypeptides expressed from the genes identified in Table 1. These antibodies are further useful for passive immunotherapy when administered to a subject.
  • the invention also provides isolated host cells and recombinant host cells that contain a gene of Table 1 or its expression product and/or fragments thereof.
  • the cells can be prokaryotic or eukaryotic and by way of example only, can be any one or more of bacterial, yeast, animal, mammalian, human, and particular subtypes thereof, e.g., stem cells, antigen presenting cells (APCs) such as dendritic cells (DCs) or T cells.
  • APCs antigen presenting cells
  • DCs dendritic cells
  • the invention provides methods for active immunotherapy, such as, inducing an immune response in a subject by delivering the proteins, polypeptides and fragments thereof, as described herein, to the subject, hi one aspect, the proteins and/or polypeptides/peptides thereof can be delivered in the context of an MHC molecule.
  • the invention also provides immune effector cells raised in vivo or in vitro in the presence and at the expense of an antigen presenting cell that presents a polypeptide fragment expressed from a gene identified in Table 1, supra, in the context of an MHC molecule.
  • the invention also provides a method of adoptive immunotherapy comprising administering an effective amount of these immune effector cells to a subject.
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of inducing cytolysis or elimination of a lung cell, wherein the cell is characterized by differential expression of a gene identified in Table 1, by contacting the cell with a therapeutic agent.
  • SEQ ID NO: 1 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a Porimin polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO:2 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a Porimin gene.
  • SEQ ID NO:3 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a PTPRTK polypeptide.
  • SEQ LO NO:4 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from an PTPRTK gene.
  • SEQ ID NO:5 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a GITR polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO:6 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a GITR gene.
  • SEQ ID NO:7 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a LT/3R polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO: 8 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a LT/3R gene.
  • SEQ ID NO:9 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a EMP2 polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO: 10 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a EMP2 gene.
  • SEQ ID NO:l 1 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a LLT1 polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO: 12 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a LLT1 gene.
  • SEQ ID NO: 13 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a 4Span4 polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO: 14 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a 4Span4 gene.
  • SEQ LO NO: 15 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a CD45 polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO: 16 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a CD45 gene.
  • SEQ ID NO: 17 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a LIGHTR polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO: 18 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a LIGHTR gene.
  • SEQ ID NO: 19 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a Toll-Like Receptor 2 polypeptide.
  • SEQ ID NO:20 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a Toll-Like Receptor 2 gene.
  • SEQ ID NO:21 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a DKFZ polypeptide.
  • SEQ LO NO:22 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a DKFZ gene.
  • polynucleotide and “oligonucleotide” are used interchangeably, and refer to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof. Polynucleotides can have any three-dimensional structure, and may perform any function, known or unknown.
  • polynucleotides a gene or gene fragment (for example, a probe, primer, EST or SAGE tag), exons, nitrons, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers.
  • a polynucleotide can comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs.
  • modifications to the nucleotide structure can be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer.
  • the sequence of nucleotides can be interrupted by non-nucleotide components.
  • a polynucleotide can be further modified after polymerization, such as by conjugation with a labeling component.
  • the term also refers to both double- and single-stranded molecules. Unless otherwise specified or required, any embodiment of this invention that is a polynucleotide encompasses both the double-stranded form and each of two complementary single-stranded forms known or predicted to make up the double-stranded form.
  • a polynucleotide is composed of a specific sequence of nucleotide bases: adenine (A); cytosine (C); guanine (G) and thymine (T).
  • polynucleotide sequence is the alphabetical representation of a polynucleotide molecule. This alphabetical representation can be input into databases in a computer having a central processing unit and used for bioinformatics applications such as functional genomics and homology searching.
  • a "gene” refers to a polynucleotide containing at least one open reading frame
  • polypeptide that is capable of encoding a particular polypeptide or protein after being transcribed and translated.
  • Any of the polynucleotides sequences described herein may be used to identify larger fragments or full-length coding sequences of the gene with which they are associated. Methods of isolating larger fragment sequences are known to those of skill in the art.
  • a “gene product” or alternatively a “gene expression product” refers to the amino acid (e.g., peptide or polypeptide) generated when a gene is transcribed and translated.
  • polypeptide is used interchangeably with the term “protein” and in its broadest sense refers to a compound of two or more subunit amino acids, amino acid analogs, or peptidomimetics.
  • the subunits may be linked by peptide bonds, hi another embodiment, the subunit may be linked by other bonds, e.g., ester, ether, etc.
  • amino acid refers to either natural and/or unnatural or synthetic amino acids, including glycine and both the D or L optical isomers, and amino acid analogs and peptidomimetics.
  • a peptide of three or more amino acids is commonly called an oligopeptide if the peptide chain is short. If the peptide chain is long, the peptide is commonly called a polypeptide or a protein.
  • Under transcriptional control is a term well understood in the art and indicates that transcription of a polynucleotide sequence, usually a DNA sequence, depends on its being operatively linked to an element which contributes to the initiation of, or promotes, transcription. "Operatively linked” refers to a juxtaposition wherein the elements are in an arrangement allowing them to function.
  • the term "Porimin gene” refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence and that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. Zhang, et al.
  • porimin receptor expressed on COS7 transfectants resulted in the loss of cell membrane integrity and cell death as measured by the leakage of intracellular lactate dehydrogenase.
  • the porimin gene was mapped to human chromosome llq22.1 and is composed of four exons spanning 133 kb of genomic DNA.
  • Sequence ID NO.: 1 is one example of a porimin gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences identified in Table 1 and the sequences that encode porimin gene expression products as defined herein.
  • biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:2 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 1, and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.172089.
  • Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to those identified under Genbank Accession numbers BF797608.1; BG506543.1; and BF105935.1, for example. These are particularly useful as probes or primers.
  • the term "porimin gene expression product, protein or polypeptide” includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ LO NO.: 2 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the porimin genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.:2 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO. : 2 or other porimin gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • PTPRTK Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase Receptor Type K
  • PTP PTP family.
  • PTPs are reported by LocusLink www.ncbi.nlm.mli.gov/LocusLink to , be signaling molecules that regulate a variety of cellular processes including cell growth, differentiation, mitotic cycle, and oncogenic transformation.
  • This PTP possesses an extracellular region, a single transmembrane region, and two tandem catalytic domains, and thus represents a receptor-type PTP.
  • the extracellular region is reported to contain a meprin-A5 antigen-PTP mu (MAM) domain, an Ig-like domain and four fibronectin type Ill-like repeats was reported to mediate homophilic intercellular interaction, possibly through the interaction with beta- and ga ma- catenin at adherens junctions.
  • MAM meprin-A5 antigen-PTP mu
  • Sequence ID NO.: 3 is one example of an PTPRTK gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth in Table 1, and the sequences that encode PTPRTK gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:4 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 3, and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.5796. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession Nos.: BM925031.1; BI755683.1; and BG680354.1, for example. These are particularly useful as probes or primers.
  • PTPRTK gene expression product, protein or polypeptide includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 4 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the PTPRTK genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.:4 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO. : 4 or other PTPRTK gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • GITR gene refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence and that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as set forth herein. LocusLink, supra, reports that the protein encoded by this gene is a member of the TNF-receptor superfamily. This receptor has been reported to have increased expression upon T-cell activation, and it is thought to play a key role in dominant immunological self-tolerance maintained by CD25(+)CD4(+) regulatory T cells.
  • Sequence ID NO.: 5 is one example of a GITR gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth in Table 1, and the sequences that encode GITR gene expression products as defined herein.
  • biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 6 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 5, and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.212680.
  • GITR gene expression product, protein or polypeptide includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 6 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the GITR genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.:6 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides have the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 6 or other GITR gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • Lymphotoxin ⁇ Receptor gene refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein.
  • the protein encoded by this gene is described by LocusLink, supra, to be a member of the tumor necrosis factor (TNF) family of receptors. It is expressed on the surface of most cell types, including cells of epithelial and myeloid lineages, but not on T and B lymphocytes.
  • the protein specifically binds the lymphotoxin membrane form (a complex of lymphotoxin- alpha and lympho toxin-beta).
  • Sequence ID NO.: 7 is one example of a LTBR gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession Nos. shown in Table 1 and the sequences that encode LT/3R gene expression products as defined herein.
  • biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:8 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95%o sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ LD NO.: 7 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.4055. Polynucleotide fragment can be generated using known recombinant techniques. These are particularly useful as probes or primers.
  • the term "LT/3R gene expression product, protein or polypeptide” includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 8 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the LT/3R genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 8 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 8 or other LT/3R gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • EMP2 gene refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein.
  • the proteins of this family are about 160 to 173 amino acid residues in size, and contain four transmembrane segments. This family also includes the claudins, which are components of tight junctions N and C terminal ends are on the cytoplasmic side.
  • Sequence ID NO.: 9 is one example of an EMP2 gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession Nos. shown in Table 1 and the sequences that encode EMP2 gene expression products as described herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO.T0 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 9 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand.
  • non-human genes the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.2013. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession Nos.: BQ678787.1; BQ425935.1; and BF673715.1. These are particularly useful as probes or primers.
  • EMP2 gene expression product, protein or polypeptide includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 10 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the EMP2 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 10 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 10 or other EMP2 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • LLNR Lectin Like NK Receptor
  • Sequence ID NO.: 11 is one example of an LLNR gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under GenBank Accession numbers identified in Table 1 and the sequences that encode LLNR gene expression products as defined herein.
  • biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 12 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 11 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art see, e.g. UniGene Cluster Hs.356250.
  • Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession numbers: BF103655.1; BQ276634.1; and BM919567.1. These are particularly useful as probes or primers.
  • the term "LLNR" gene expression product, protein or polypeptide” includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 12 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the LLNR genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 12 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO. : 12 or other LLNR gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • the term "4Span4 gene” refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein.
  • This gene is reported by LocusLink, supra, to be a member of the membrane-spanning 4A gene family. Members of this protein family are characterized by common structural features and similar intron/exon splice boundaries and display unique expression patterns among hematopoietic cells and nonlymphoid tissues. The gene encoding this protein is localized to 1 lql2.3, among a cluster of family members. Sequence ID NO.: 13 is one example of an 4Span4 gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode 4Span4 gene expression products as defined herein.
  • biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 14 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ LO NO.: 13 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.150184.
  • Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession numbers: BI820508.1; BI771406.1; and BI766299.1, for example. These are particularly useful as probes or primers.
  • the term "4Span4 gene expression product, protein or polypeptide” includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 14 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the 4Span4 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95 % homologous to SEQ LO NO.: 14 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 14 or other 4S ⁇ an4 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • CD45 refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein.
  • PTP protein tyrosine phosphatase
  • PTPs are known to be signaling molecules that regulate a variety of cellular processes including cell growth, differentiation, mitotic cycle, and oncogenic transformation.
  • This PTP contains an extracellular domain, a single transmembrane segment and two tandem intracytoplasmic catalytic domains, and thus belongs to receptor type PTP.
  • This gene is specifically expressed in hematopoietic cells. This PTP has been shown to be an essential regulator of T- and B-cell antigen receptor signaling.
  • Sequence ID NO.: 15 is one example of an CD45 gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode CD45 gene expression products as defined herein.
  • biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ LD NO: 16 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 15 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster
  • CD45 gene expression product, protein or polypeptide includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ LD NO.: 15 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the CD45 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 16 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides have the amino acid sequence of SEQ LD NO. : 15 or other CD45 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • TNFRSF14 refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein.
  • LocusLink reports that the protein encoded by this gene is a member of the TNF-receptor superfamily. This receptor was identified as a cellular mediator of herpes simplex virus (HSV) entry. Binding of HSN viral envelope glycoprotein D (gD) to this receptor protein has been shown to be part of the viral entry mechanism. The cytoplasmic region of this receptor was found to bind to several TRAF family members, which may mediate the signal transduction pathways that activate the immune response.
  • HSV herpes simplex virus
  • Sequence ID NO.: 17 is one example of an TNFRSF14 gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode TNFRSF14 gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 18 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 17 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand.
  • TNFRSF14 gene expression product, protein or polypeptide includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 18 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the TNFRSF14 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ LD NO.: 18 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 18 or other TNFRSF14 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • TLR-2 gene refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein.
  • TLR Toll-like receptor
  • Sequence LD NO.: 19 is one example of an TLR-2 gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode TLR-2 gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 20 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95%o sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 19 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand.
  • TLR-2 expression product, protein or polypeptide includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 20 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the TLR genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 20 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 20 or other TLR-2 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • DKFZ refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein.
  • Sequence ID NO.: 21 is one example of an DKFZ gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode DKFZ gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 22 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 21 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters.
  • genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.105460. Polynucleotide fragments can be generated using methods known in the art. These are particularly useful as probes or primers.
  • DKFZ gene expression product, protein or polypeptide includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 22 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the DKFZ genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell.
  • the term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides.
  • the term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90% or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 22 and which have the biological activity as described herein.
  • homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ LD NO.: 22 or other DKFZ gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions.
  • the term “comprising” is intended to mean that the compositions and methods include the recited elements, but not excluding others. "Consisting essentially of when used to define compositions and methods, shall mean excluding other elements of any essential significance to the combination. Thus, a composition consisting essentially of the elements as defined herein would not exclude trace contaminants from the isolation and purification method and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as phosphate buffered saline, preservatives, and the like.
  • compositions of this invention consisting of excluding more than trace elements of other ingredients and substantial method steps for administering the compositions of this invention. Embodiments defined by each of these transition terms are within the scope of this invention.
  • isolated means separated from constituents, cellular and otherwise, in which the polynucleotide, peptide, polypeptide, protein, antibody, or fragments thereof, are normally associated with in nature.
  • an isolated polynucleotide is separated from the 3' and 5' contiguous nucleotides with which it is normally associated with in its native or natural environment, e.g., on the chromosome.
  • a non-naturally occurring polynucleotide, peptide, polypeptide, protein, antibody, or fragments thereof does not require “isolation” to distinguish it from its naturally occurring counterpart.
  • a "concentrated”, “separated” or “diluted” polynucleotide, peptide, polypeptide, protein, antibody, or fragments thereof is distinguishable from its naturally occurring counterpart in that the concentration or number of molecules per volume is greater than "concentrated” or less than "separated” than that of its naturally occurring counterpart.
  • a non-naturally occurring polynucleotide is provided as a separate embodiment from the isolated naturally occurring polynucleotide.
  • a protein produced in a bacterial cell is provided as a separate embodiment from the naturally occurring protein isolated from a eukaryotic cell in which it is produced in nature.
  • Gene delivery are terms referring to the introduction of an exogenous polynucleotide (sometimes referred to as a "transgene") into a host cell, irrespective of the method used for the introduction.
  • exogenous polynucleotide sometimes referred to as a "transgene”
  • Such methods include a variety of well-known techniques such as vector-mediated gene transfer (by, e.g., viral infection/transfection, or various other protein-based or lipid-based gene delivery complexes) as well as techniques facilitating the delivery of "naked" polynucleotides (such as electroporation, "gene gun” delivery and various other techniques used for the introduction of polynucleotides).
  • the introduced polynucleotide may be stably or transiently maintained in the host cell.
  • Stable maintenance typically requires that the introduced polynucleotide either contains an origin of replication compatible with the host cell or integrates into a replicon of the host cell such as an extraclrromosomal replicon (e.g., a plasmid) or a nuclear or mitochondrial chromosome.
  • a replicon of the host cell such as an extraclrromosomal replicon (e.g., a plasmid) or a nuclear or mitochondrial chromosome.
  • a number of vectors are known in the art to be capable of mediating transfer of genes to mammalian cells.
  • a "gene delivery vehicle” is defined as any molecule that can carry inserted polynucleotides into a host cell.
  • gene delivery vehicles are liposomes, biocompatible polymers, including natural polymers and synthetic polymers; lipoproteins; polypeptides; polysaccharides; lipopolysaccharides; artificial viral envelopes; recombinant yeast cells, metal particles; and bacteria, or viruses, such as baculovirus, adenovirus and retrovirus, bacteriophage, cos id, plasmid, fungal vectors and other recombination vehicles typically used in the art which have been described for expression in a variety of eukaryotic and prokaryotic hosts, and may be used for gene therapy as well as for simple protein expression.
  • a "viral vector” is defined as a recombinantly produced virus or viral particle that comprises a polynucleotide to be delivered into a host cell, either in vivo, ex vivo or in vitro.
  • viral vectors include retroviral vectors, adenovirus vectors, adeno-associated virus vectors, alphavirus vectors and the like.
  • Alphavirus vectors such as Semliki Forest virus-based vectors and Sindbis virus-based vectors, have also been developed for use in gene therapy and immunotherapy. See, Schlesinger and Dubensky (1999) Curr. Opin. Biotechnol. 5:434-439 and Ying et al. (1999) Nat. Med. 5(7):823-827.
  • a vector construct refers to the polynucleotide comprising the retroviral genome or part thereof, and a therapeutic gene.
  • retroviral mediated gene transfer or “retroviral transduction” carries the same meaning and refers to the process by which a gene or nucleic acid sequences are stably transferred into the host cell by virtue of the virus entering the cell and integrating its genome into the host cell genome.
  • the virus can enter the host cell via its normal mechanism of infection or be modified such that it binds to a different host cell surface receptor or ligand to enter the cell.
  • retroviral vector refers to a viral particle capable of introducing exogenous nucleic acid into a cell through a viral or viral-like entry mechanism. Retro viruses carry their genetic information in the form of RNA; however, once the virus infects a cell, the RNA is reverse-transcribed into the DNA form which integrates into the genomic DNA of the infected cell. The integrated DNA form is called a provirus.
  • a DNA viral vector such as an adenovirus (Ad) or adeno-associated virus (AAV)
  • Ad adeno-associated virus
  • a vector construct refers to the polynucleotide comprising the viral genome or part thereof, and a transgene.
  • Ads Adenoviruses
  • Ads are a relatively well characterized, homogenous group of viruses, including over 50 serotypes. See, e.g., WO 95121 Oil. Ads are easy to grow and do not require integration into the host cell genome. Recombinant Ad derived vectors, particularly those that reduce the potential for recombination and generation of wild- type virus, have also been constructed. See, WO 95/00655 and WO 95/11984. Wild- type AAV has high infectivity and specificity integrating into the host cell's genome. See, Hermonat and Muzyczka (1984) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:6466-6470 and Lebkowski et al. (1988) Mol. Cell.
  • Vectors that contain both a promoter and a cloning site into which a polynucleotide can be operatively linked are well known in the art. Such vectors are capable of transcribing RNA in vitro or in vivo, and are commercially available from sources such as Stratagene (La Jolla, CA) and Promega Biotech (Madison, WT). In order to optimize expression and/or in vitro transcription, it maybe necessary to remove, add or alter 5' and/or 3' untranslated portions of the clones to eliminate extra, potential inappropriate alternative translation initiation codons or other sequences that may interfere with or reduce expression, either at the level of transcription or translation.
  • Gene delivery vehicles also include several non-viral vectors, including DNA/liposome complexes, recombinant yeast cells, and targeted viral protein-DNA complexes. Liposomes that also comprise a targeting antibody or fragment thereof can be used in the methods of this invention.
  • the nucleic acid or proteins of this invention can be conjugated to antibodies or binding fragments thereof which bind cell surface antigens, e.g., TCR, CD3 or CD4.
  • a "probe” when used in the context of polynucleotide manipulation refers to an oligonucleotide that is provided as a reagent to detect a target potentially present in a sample of interest by hybridizing with the target.
  • a probe will comprise a label or a means by which a label can be attached, either before or subsequent to the hybridization reaction.
  • Suitable labels include, but are not limited to radioisotopes, fluorochromes, chemiluminescent compounds, dyes, and proteins, including enzymes.
  • a “primer” is a short polynucleotide, generally with a free 3' -OH group that binds to a target or "template” potentially present in a sample of interest by hybridizing with the target, and thereafter promoting polymerization of a polynucleotide complementary to the target.
  • a “polymerase chain reaction” (“PCR”) is a reaction in which replicate copies are made of a target polynucleotide using a "pair of primers” or a “set of primers” consisting of an "upstream” and a “downstream” primer, and a catalyst of polymerization, such as a DNA polymerase, and typically a thermally-stable polymerase enzyme.
  • PCR A PRACTICAL APPROACH
  • All processes of producing replicate copies of a polynucleotide, such as PCR or gene cloning, are collectively referred to herein as "replication.”
  • a primer can also be used as a probe in hybridization reactions, such as Southern or Northern blot analyses. Sambrook et al., supra.
  • An expression “database” denotes a set of stored data that represent a collection of sequences, which in turn represent a collection of biological reference materials.
  • cDNAs refers to complementary DNA that is mRNA molecules present in a cell or organism made into cDNA with an enzyme such as reverse transcriptase.
  • a "cDNA library” is a collection of all of the mRNA molecules present in a cell or organism, all turned into cDNA molecules with the enzyme reverse transcriptase, then inserted into “vectors” (other DNA molecules that can continue to replicate after addition of foreign DNA).
  • vectors for libraries include bacteriophage (also known as "phage"), viruses that infect bacteria, for example, lambda phage. The library can then be probed for the specific cDNA (and thus mRNA) of interest.
  • expression refers to the process by which polynucleotides are transcribed into mRNA and/or the process by which the transcribed mRNA is subsequently being translated into peptides, polypeptides, or proteins. If the polynucleotide is derived from genomic DNA, expression may include splicing of the mRNA in a eukaryotic cell. "Differentially expressed” as applied to a gene, refers to the differential production of the mRNA transcribed and/or translated from the gene or the protein product encoded by the gene. A differentially expressed gene may be overexpressed or underexpressed as compared to the expression level of a normal or control cell.
  • solid phase support or “solid support”, used interchangeably, is not limited to a specific type of support. Rather a large number of supports are available and are known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Solid phase supports include silica gels, resins, derivatized plastic films, glass beads, cotton, plastic beads, alumina gels, microarrays and chips.
  • solid support also includes synthetic antigen-presenting matrices, cells, and liposomes.
  • a suitable solid phase support may be selected on the basis of desired end use and suitability for various protocols.
  • solid phase support may refer to resins such as polystyrene (e.g., PAM-resin obtained from Bachem Inc., Peninsula Laboratories, etc.), POLYHIPE® resin (obtained from Aminotech, Canada), polyamide resin (obtained from Peninsula Laboratories), polystyrene resin grafted with polyethylene glycol (TentaGel®, Rapp Polymere, Tubingen, Germany) or polydimethylacrylamide resin (obtained from Milligen Biosearch, California).
  • polystyrene e.g., PAM-resin obtained from Bachem Inc., Peninsula Laboratories, etc.
  • POLYHIPE® resin obtained from Aminotech, Canada
  • polyamide resin obtained from Peninsula Laboratories
  • a polynucleotide also can be attached to a solid support for use in high throughput screening assays.
  • PCT WO 97/10365 discloses the construction of high density oligonucleotide chips. See also, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,405,783; 5,412,087; and 5,445,934.
  • the probes are synthesized on a derivatized glass surface also known as chip arrays.
  • Photoprotected nucleoside phosphoramidites are coupled to the glass surface, selectively deprotected by photolysis through a photolithographic mask, and reacted with a second protected nucleoside phosphoramidite. The coupling/deprotection process is repeated until the desired probe is complete.
  • Hybridization refers to a reaction in which one or more polynucleotides react to form a complex that is stabilized via hydrogen bonding between the bases of the nucleotide residues.
  • the hydrogen bonding may occur by Watson-Crick base pairing, Hoogstein binding, or in any other sequence-specific manner.
  • the complex may comprise two strands forming a duplex structure, three or more strands forming a multi-stranded complex, a single self-hybridizing strand, or any combination of these.
  • a hybridization reaction may constitute a step in a more extensive process, such as the initiation of a PCR reaction, or the enzymatic cleavage of a polynucleotide by a ribozyme.
  • Hybridization reactions can be performed under conditions of different "stringency". In general, a low stringency hybridization reaction is carried out at about 40 °C in 10 x SSC or a solution of equivalent ionic strength temperature. A moderate stringency hybridization is typically performed at about 50 °C in 6 x SSC, and a high stringency hybridization reaction is generally performed at about 60 °C in 1 x SSC. When hybridization occurs in an antiparallel configuration between two single-stranded polynucleotides, the reaction is called “annealing" and those polynucleotides are described as “complementary”.
  • a double-stranded polynucleotide can be "complementary” or “homologous” to another polynucleotide, if hybridization can occur between one of the strands of the first polynucleotide and the second.
  • “Complementarity” or “homology” is quantifiable in terms of the proportion of bases in opposing strands that are expected to form hydrogen bonding with each other, according to generally accepted base-pairing rules.
  • a polynucleotide or polynucleotide region has a certain percentage (for example, 80%o, 85%, 90%, or 95%) of "sequence identity" to another sequence means that, when aligned, that percentage of bases (or amino acids) are the same in comparing the two sequences.
  • This alignment and the percent homology or sequence identity can be determined using software programs known in the art, for example those described in CURRENT PROTOCOLS JN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY (F.M. Ausubel et al., eds., 1987) Supplement 30, section 7.7.18, Table 7.7.1.
  • default parameters are used for alignment.
  • Hyperplasia is a form of controlled cell proliferation involving an increase in cell number in a tissue or organ, without significant alteration in structure or function.
  • Metaplasia is a form of controlled cell growth in which one type of fully differentiated cell substitutes for another type of differentiated cell. Metaplasia can occur in epithelial or connective tissue cells. Atypical metaplasia involves a somewhat disorderly metaplastic epithelium.
  • Neoplastic cells As used herein, the terms “neoplastic cells”, “neoplasia”, “tumor”, “tumor cells”, “cancer” and “cancer cells”, (used interchangeably) refer to cells which exhibit relatively autonomous growth, so that they exhibit an aberrant growth phenotype characterized by a significant loss of control of cell proliferation (i.e., de-regulated cell division). Neoplastic cells can be malignant or benign. A metastatic cell or tissue means that the cell can invade and destroy neighboring body structures. "Suppressing" tumor growth indicates a growth state that is curtailed when compared to growth without contact with educated, antigen-specific immune effector cells described herein.
  • Tumor cell growth can be assessed by any means known in the art, including, but not limited to, measuring tumor size, determining whether tumor cells are proliferating using a H-thymidine incorporation assay, or counting tumor cells.
  • "Suppressing" tumor cell growth means any or all of the following states: slowing, delaying, and stopping tumor growth, as well as tumor shrinkage. All numerical designations, e.g., pH, temperature, time, concentration, and molecular weight, including ranges, are approximations which are varied ( + ) or ( - ) by increments of 0.1. It is to be understood, although not always explicitly stated that all numerical designations are preceded by the term "about”.
  • an "antibody” includes whole antibodies and any antigen binding fragment or a single chain thereof.
  • antibody includes any protein or peptide containing molecule that comprises at least a portion of an immunoglobulin molecule.
  • examples of such include, but are not limited to a complementarity determining region (CDR) of a heavy or light chain or a ligand binding portion thereof, a heavy chain or light chain variable region, a heavy chain or light chain constant region, a framework (FR) region, or any portion thereof, or at least one portion of a binding protein, any of which can be incorporated into an antibody of the present invention.
  • CDR complementarity determining region
  • the antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal and can be isolated from any suitable biological source, e.g., murine, rat, sheep and canine. Additional sources are identified infra.
  • antibody is further intended to encompass digestion fragments, specified portions, derivatives and variants thereof, including antibody mimetics or comprising portions of antibodies that mimic the structure and/or function of an antibody or specified fragment or portion thereof, including single chain antibodies and fragments thereof.
  • binding fragments encompassed within the term "antigen binding portion" of an antibody include a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment consisting of the NL, NH, CL and CH, domains; a F(ab')2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; a Fd fragment consisting of the NH and CH, domains; a Fv fragment consisting of the NL and NH domains of a single arm of an antibody, a dAb fragment (Ward et al.
  • Single chain antibodies are also intended to be encompassed within the term "fragment of an antibody.” Any of the above-noted antibody fragments are obtained using conventional techniques known to those of skill in the art, and the fragments are screened for binding specificity and neutralization activity in the same manner as are intact antibodies.
  • epitope means a protein determinant capable of specific binding to an antibody. Epitopes usually consist of chemically active surface groupings of molecules such as amino acids or sugar side chains and usually have specific three dimensional structural characteristics, as well as specific charge characteristics. Conformational and nonconformational epitopes are distinguished in that the binding to the former but not the latter is lost in the presence of denaturing solvents.
  • antibody variant is intended to include antibodies produced in a species other than a mouse or an isotype of an antibody of this invention.
  • antibody variant also includes antibodies containing post-translational modifications to the linear polypeptide sequence of the antibody or fragment. It further encompasses fully human antibodies.
  • antibody derivative is intended to encompass molecules that bind an epitope as defined above and which are modifications or derivatives of a native monoclonal antibody of this invention. Derivatives include, but are not limited to, for example, bispecif ⁇ c, multispecific, heterospecific, trispecific, tetraspecif ⁇ c, multispecific antibodies, diabodies, chimeric, recombinant and humanized.
  • bispecific molecule is intended to include any agent, e.g., a protein, peptide, or protein or peptide complex, which has two different binding specificities.
  • multispecific molecule or “heterospecific molecule” is intended to include any agent, e.g. a protein, peptide, or protein or peptide complex, which has more than two different binding specificities.
  • heteroantibodies refers to two or more antibodies, antibody binding fragments (e.g., Fab), derivatives thereof, or antigen binding regions linked together, at least two of which have different specificities.
  • human antibody as used herein, is intended to include antibodies having variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences.
  • human antibodies of the invention may include amino acid residues not encoded by human germline immunoglobulin sequences (e.g., mutations introduced by random or site-specific mutagenesis in vitro or by somatic mutation in vivo).
  • human antibody as used herein, is not intended to include antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences.
  • human antibody refers to an antibody in which substantially every part of the protein (e.g., CDR, framework, CL, C H domains (e.g., CHI, C H 2 > Cr ⁇ ), hinge, (N L , VH)) is substantially non-immunogenic in humans, with only minor sequence changes or variations.
  • antibodies designated primate monkey, baboon, chimpanzee, etc.
  • rodent mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, hamster, and the like
  • other mammals designate such species, sub-genus, genus, sub-family, family specific antibodies.
  • chimeric antibodies include any combination of the above.
  • a human antibody is distinct from a chimeric or humanized antibody. It is pointed out that a human antibody can be produced by a non-human animal or prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell that is capable of expressing functionally rearranged human immunoglobulin (e.g., heavy chain and/or light chain) genes. Further, when a human antibody is a single chain antibody, it can comprise a linker peptide that is not found in native human antibodies.
  • an Fv can comprise a linker peptide, such as two to about eight glycine or other amino acid residues, which connects the variable region of the heavy chain and the variable region of the light chain.
  • linker peptides are considered to be of human origin.
  • a human antibody is "derived from” a particular germline sequence if the antibody is obtained from a system using human immunoglobulin sequences, e.g., by immunizing a trans genie mouse carrying human immunoglobulin genes or by screening a human immunoglobulin gene library.
  • a human antibody that is "derived from” a human germline immunoglobulin sequence can be identified as such by comparing the amino acid sequence of the human antibody to the amino acid sequence of human germline immunoglobulins.
  • a selected human antibody typically is at least 90% identical in amino acids sequence to an amino acid sequence encoded by a human germline immunoglobulin gene and contains amino acid residues that identify the human antibody as being human when compared to the germline immunoglobulin amino acid sequences of other species (e.g., murine germline sequences).
  • a human antibody may be at least 95%, or even at least 96%, 91%, 98%o, or 99% identical in amino acid sequence to the amino acid sequence encoded by the germline immunoglobulin gene.
  • a human antibody derived from a particular human germline sequence will display no more than 10 amino acid differences from the amino acid sequence encoded by the human germline immunoglobulin gene.
  • the human antibody may display no more than 5, or even no more than 4, 3, 2, or 1 amino acid difference from the amino acid sequence encoded by the germline immunoglobulin gene.
  • the terms "monoclonal antibody” or “monoclonal antibody composition” as used herein refer to a preparation of antibody molecules of single molecular composition.
  • a monoclonal antibody composition displays a single binding specificity and affinity for a particular epitope.
  • a "human monoclonal antibody” refers to antibodies displaying a single binding specificity which have variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences.
  • recombinant human antibody includes all human antibodies that are prepared, expressed, created or isolated by recombinant means, such as antibodies isolated from an animal (e.g., a mouse) that is transgenic or transchromosomal for human immunoglobulin genes or a hybridoma prepared therefrom, antibodies isolated from a host cell transformed to express the antibody, e.g., from a transfectoma, antibodies isolated from a recombinant, combinatorial human antibody library, and antibodies prepared, expressed, created or isolated by any other means that involve splicing of human immunoglobulin gene sequences to other DNA sequences.
  • Such recombinant human antibodies have variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences.
  • such recombinant human antibodies can be subjected to in vitro mutagenesis (or, when an animal transgenic for human Ig sequences is used, in vivo somatic mutagenesis) and thus the amino acid sequences of the NH and NL regions of the recombinant antibodies are sequences that, while derived from and related to human germline NH and NL sequences, may not naturally exist within the human antibody germline repertoire in vivo.
  • “isotype” refers to the antibody class (e.g., IgM or IgGl) that is encoded by heavy chain constant region genes.
  • composition is intended to mean a combination of active agent and another compound or composition, inert (for example, a detectable agent or label) or active, such as an adjuvant.
  • pharmaceutical composition is intended to include the combination of an active agent with a carrier, inert or active, making the composition suitable for diagnostic or therapeutic use in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier encompasses any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers, such as a phosphate buffered saline solution, water, and emulsions, such as an oil/water or water/oil emulsion, and various types of wetting agents.
  • the compositions also can include stabilizers and preservatives.
  • an "effective amount” is an amount sufficient to effect beneficial or desired results such as prevention or treatment.
  • An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations, applications or dosages.
  • a "subject,” “individual” or “patient” is used interchangeably herein, which refers to a vertebrate, preferably a mammal, more preferably a human. Mammals include, but are not limited to, rnurines, simians, humans, farm animals, sport animals, and pets.
  • a "control” is an alternative subject or sample used in an experiment for comparison purpose.
  • a control can be "positive” or "negative".
  • a positive control a subject or a sample from a subject, carrying such alteration and exhibiting syndromes characteristic of that disease
  • a negative control a subject or a sample from a subject lacking the altered expression and clinical syndrome of that disease
  • this invention provides various methods for aiding in the diagnosis of the neoplastic state of a lung cell that is characterized by abnormal cell growth in the form of, e.g., malignancy, hyperplasia or metaplasia.
  • the methods are particularly useful for aiding in the diagnosis of non-small cell lung cancer cell.
  • the neoplastic state of a cell generally is determined by noting whether the growth of the cell is not governed by the usual limitation of normal growth.
  • the term also is to include genotypic changes that occur prior to detection of this growth in the form of a tumor and are causative of these phenotypic changes.
  • the phenotypic changes associated with the neoplastic state of a cell include a more rounded cell morphology, looser substratum attachment, loss of contact inhibition, loss of anchorage dependence, release of proteases such as plasminogen activator, increased sugar transport, decreased serum requirement, expression of fetal antigens and the like. (See, Luria et al. (1978) GENERAL VIROLOGY, 3 d edition, 436-446 (John Wiley & Sons, New York)).
  • one embodiment is a method of diagnosing the condition of a lung cell by screening for the presence of a differentially expressed gene isolated from a sample containing or suspected of containing a lung cell, in which the differential expression of the gene is indicative of the neoplastic state of the lung cell.
  • the gene is expressed more in a neoplastic lung cell or a lung tumor cell as compared to normal lung cell, and is selected from those identified in Table 1.
  • Detection can be by any appropriate method, including for example, detecting the quantity of mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of cDNA produced from the reverse transcription of the mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of the polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene.
  • Probes for each of these methods are provided in Table 1. These methods can be performed on a sample by sample basis or modified for high throughput analysis. Additionally, databases containing quantitative full or partial transcripts or protein sequences isolated from a cell sample can be searched and analyzed for the presence and amount of transcript or expressed gene product. In one aspect, the database contains at least one of the sequences shown in Table 1. For the purpose of illustration only, gene expression is determined by noting the amount (if any, e.g., altered) expression of the gene in the test system at the level of an mRNA transcribed from at least one gene identified in Table 1. In a separate embodiment, augmentation of the level of the polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene is indicative of the presence of the neoplastic condition of the cell.
  • a decrease in the level of polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene is indicative of the neoplastic condition.
  • the method can be used for aiding in the diagnosis of lung cancer such as non-small cell lung cancer by detecting a genotype that is correlated with a phenotype characteristic of primary lung tumor cells. Thus, by detecting this genotype prior to tumor growth, one can predict a predisposition to cancer and/or provide early diagnosis and treatment.
  • Cell or tissue samples used for this invention encompass body fluid, solid tissue samples, tissue cultures or cells derived there from and the progeny thereof, and sections or smears prepared from any of these sources, or any other samples that may contain a lung cell having a gene described herein.
  • the sample comprises cells prepared from a subject's lung tissue.
  • nucleic acid contained in the aforementioned samples is first extracted according to standard methods in the art.
  • mRNA can be isolated using various lyric enzymes or chemical solutions according to the procedures set forth in Sambrook et al. (1989) supra, or extracted by nucleic-acid-binding resins following the accompanying instructions provided by manufactures.
  • the mRNA of a proto-oncogene of interest contained in the extracted nucleic acid sample is then detected by hybridization (e.g., Northern blot analysis) and/or amplification procedures according to methods widely known in the art or based on the methods exemplified herein.
  • Nucleic acid molecules having at least 10 nucleotides and exhibiting sequence complementarity or homology to at least one gene identified in Table 1 find utility as hybridization probes. It is known in the art that a "perfectly matched" probe is not needed for a specific hybridization. Minor changes in probe sequence achieved by substitution, deletion or insertion of a small number of bases do not affect the hybridization specificity. In general, as much as 20% base-pair mismatch (when optimally aligned) can be tolerated.
  • a probe useful for detecting mRNA is at least about 80% identical to the homologous region of comparable size contained in the genes or polynucleotides identified in Table 1 identified sequences, which have the Locus Link numbers identified in Table 1.
  • the probe is 85% identical to the corresponding gene sequence after alignment of the homologous region, or alternatively, it exhibits 90% identity.
  • Additional probes can be derived from sequences for the genes identified by the Locus Link Nos. provided in Table 1, or to a homologous region of comparable size contained in the previously identified sequences, which have the Locus Link Nos. identified in Table 1. These probes can be used in radioassays (e.g., Southern and Northern blot analysis) to detect, prognose, diagnose or monitor various neoplastic states resulting from differential expression of a gene of interest. The total size of fragment, as well as the size of the complementary stretches, will depend on the intended use or application of the particular nucleic acid segment.
  • nucleotide probes having complementary sequences over stretches greater than about 10 nucleotides in length are used, so as to increase stability and selectivity of the hybrid, and thereby improving the specificity of particular hybrid molecules obtained.
  • Such fragments may be readily prepared by, for example, directly synthesizing the fragment by chemical means, by application of nucleic acid reproduction technology, such as the PCRTM teclmology with two priming oligonucleotides as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,603,102 or by introducing selected sequences into recombinant vectors for recombinant production, i one aspect, a probe is about 50 to about 75, nucleotides or alternatively, about 50 to about 100 nucleotides in length. Ln certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to employ nucleic acid sequences as described herein in combination with an appropriate means, such as a label, for detecting hybridization and therefore complementary sequences.
  • nucleic acid reproduction technology such as the PCRTM teclmology with two priming oligonucleotides as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,603,102
  • a probe is about 50 to about 75, nucleotides or alternatively, about 50 to about 100 nucleotides
  • indicator means include fluorescent, radioactive, enzymatic or other ligands, such as avidin/biotin, which are capable of giving a detectable signal.
  • fluorescent label or an enzyme tag such as urease, alkaline phosphatase or peroxidase, instead of radioactive or other environmental undesirable reagents, hi the case of enzyme tags, colorimetric t indicator substrates are known which can be employed to provide a means visible to the human eye or spectrophotometrically, to identify specific hybridization with complementary nucleic acid-containing samples. Hybridization reactions can be performed under conditions of different "stringency".
  • nucleotide probes of the present invention can also be used as primers and detection of genes or gene transcripts that are differentially expressed in certain body tissues.
  • a primer useful for detecting the aforementioned differentially expressed mRNA is at least about 80% identical to the homologous region of comparable size contained in the previously identified sequences, which have the Locus Link Nos. numbers identified in Table 1.
  • amplification means any method employing a primer-dependent polymerase capable of replicating a target sequence with reasonable fidelity. Amplification may be carried out by natural or recombinant DNA-polymerases such as T7 DNA polymerase, Klenow fragment of E.coli DNA polymerase, and reverse transcriptase.
  • a known amplification method is PCR, MacPherson et al., PCR: A PRACTICAL APPROACH, (IRL Press at Oxford University Press (1991)).
  • PCR conditions used for each application reaction are empirically determined. A number of parameters influence the success of a reaction. Among them are annealing temperature and time, extension time, Mg 2+ ATP concentration, pH, and the relative concentration of primers, templates, and deoxyribonucleotides. After amplification, the resulting DNA fragments can be detected by agarose gel electrophoresis followed by visualization with ethidium bromide staining and ultraviolet illumination. A specific amplification of differentially expressed genes of interest can be verified by demonstrating that the amplified DNA fragment has the predicted size, exhibits the predicted restriction digestion pattern, and/or hybridizes to the correct cloned DNA sequence.
  • the probes also can be attached to a solid support for use in high throughput screening assays using methods known in the art.
  • the probes of this invention are synthesized on a derivatized glass surface.
  • Photoprotected nucleoside phosphoramidites are coupled to the glass surface, selectively deprotected by photolysis through a photolithographic mask, and reacted with a second protected nucleoside phosphoramidite. The coupling/deprotection process is repeated until the desired probe is complete.
  • the expression level of a gene can also be determined through exposure of a nucleic acid sample to a probe-modified chip. Extracted nucleic acid is labeled, for example, with a fluorescent tag, preferably during an amplification step.
  • Hybridization of the labeled sample is performed at an appropriate stringency level.
  • the degree of probe-nucleic acid hybridization is quantitatively measured using a detection device, such as a confocal microscope. See U.S. Pat Nos. 5,578,832 and 5,631,734. The obtained measurement is directly correlated with gene expression level.
  • the probes and high density oligonucleotide probe arrays also provide an effective means of monitoring expression of the genes identified in Table 1. They are also useful to screen for compositions that upregulate or downregulate the expression of the genes identified in Table 1.
  • the methods of this invention are used to monitor expression of the genes identified in Table 1 which specifically hybridize to the probes of this invention in response to defined stimuli, such as an exposure of a cell or subject to a drug.
  • the hybridized nucleic acids are detected by detecting one or more labels attached to the sample nucleic acids.
  • the labels may be incorporated by any of a number of means known to those of skill in the art. However, in one aspect, the label is simultaneously incorporated during the amplification step in the preparation of the sample nucleic acid.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • transcription amplification as described above, using a labeled nucleotide (e.g., fluorescein-labeled UTP and/or CTP) incorporates a label in to the transcribed nucleic acids.
  • a label may be added directly to the original nucleic acid sample (e.g., mRNA, polyA, mRNA, cDNA, etc.) or to the amplification product after the amplification is completed.
  • Means of attaching labels to nucleic acids are known to those of skill in the art and include, for example nick translation or end-labeling (e.g., with a labeled RNA) by kinasing of the nucleic acid and subsequent attachment (ligation) of a nucleic acid linker joining the sample nucleic acid to a label (e.g., a fluorophore).
  • Detectable labels suitable for use in the present invention include any composition detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, electrical, optical or chemical means.
  • Useful labels in the present invention include biotin for staining with labeled streptavidin conjugate, magnetic beads (e.g., DynabeadsTM), fluorescent dyes (e.g., fluorescein, Texas red, rhodamine, green fluorescent protein, and the like), radiolabels (e.g., H, I, S, C, or P) enzymes (e.g., horse radish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase and others commonly used in an ELISA), and colorimetric labels such as colloidal gold or colored glass or plastic (e.g., polystyrene, polypropylene, latex, etc.) beads.
  • Patents teaching the use of such labels include U.S. Patents Nos.
  • radiolabels may be detected using photographic film or scintillation counters
  • fluorescent markers may be detected using a photodetector to detect emitted light.
  • Enzymatic labels are typically detected by providing the enzyme with a substrate and detecting the reaction product produced by the action of the enzyme on the substrate, and colorimetric labels are detected by simply visualizing the colored label.
  • the label may be added to the target (sample) nucleic acid(s) prior to, or after the hybridization.
  • detectable labels that are directly attached to or incorporated into the target (sample) nucleic acid prior to hybridization, i contrast, "indirect labels" are joined to the hybrid duplex after hybridization.
  • the indirect label is attached to a binding moiety that has been attached to the target nucleic acid prior to the hybridization.
  • the target nucleic acid may be biotinylated before the hybridization. After hybridization, an avidin-conjugated fluorophore will bind the biotin bearing hybrid duplexes providing a label that is easily detected.
  • nucleic acid sample also may be modified prior to hybridization to the high density probe array in order to reduce sample complexity thereby decreasing background signal and improving sensitivity of the measurement using methods known in the art, e.g., the methods disclosed in WO 97/10365.
  • Results from the chip assay are typically analyzed using a computer software program. See, fox example, EP 0717 113 A2 and WO 95/20681.
  • the hybridization data is read into the program, which calculates the expression level of the targeted gene(s) i.e., the genes identified in Table 1. This figure is compared against existing data sets of gene expression levels for diseased and healthy individuals. A correlation between the obtained data and that of a set of diseased individuals indicates the onset of a disease in the subject patient. Also within the scope of this application is a data base useful for the detection of neoplastic lung tissue comprising one or more of the sequences (or parts thereof) of the genes listed Table 1. These polynucleotide sequences are stored in a digital storage medium such that a data processing system for standardized representation of the genes that identify a lung cancer cell is compiled.
  • the data processing system is useful to analyze gene expression between two cells by first selecting a cell suspected of being of a neoplastic phenotype or genotype and then isolating polynucleotides from the cell. The isolated polynucleotides are then sequenced. The sequences from the sample are compared with the sequence(s) present in the database using homology search techniques described above. In one aspect, greater than 90% is selected, or alternatively greater than 95% is selected, or alternatively greater than or equal to 91% sequence identity is selected, between the test sequence and at least one sequence identified in Table 1 or its complement, is a positive indication that the polynucleotide has been isolated from a lung cancer cell as defined above. Alternatively, one can compare a sample against a database.
  • RNAs are isolated from cell or tissue samples using methods known in the art and described for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) supra.
  • the gene transcripts can be converted to cDNA.
  • a sampling of the gene transcripts are subjected to sequence-specific analysis and quantified. These gene transcript sequence abundances are compared against reference database sequence abundances including normal data sets for diseased and healthy patients.
  • the patient has the disease(s) with which the patient's data set most closely correlates which includes the overexpression of the transcripts identified herein. Differential expression of the genes of interest can also be determined by examining the protein product. A variety of techniques are available in the art for protein analysis.
  • radioimmunoassays include but are not limited to radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunoradiometric assays), "sandwich” immunoassays, immunoradiometric assays, in situ immunoassays (using e.g., colloidal gold, enzyme or radioisotope labels), western blot analysis, immunoprecipitation assays, immunofluorescent assays, and PAGE-SDS.
  • One means to determine protein level involves (a) providing a biological sample containing polypeptides; and (b) measuring the amount of any immunospecific binding that occurs between an antibody reactive to the expression product of a gene of interest and a component in the sample, in which the amount of immunospecific binding indicates the level of the expressed proteins.
  • Antibodies that specifically recognize and bind to the protein products of these genes are required for these immunoassays. These may be purchased from commercial vendors or generated and screened using methods well known in the art. See Harlow and Lane (1988) supra, and Sambrook et al. (1989) supra. Alternatively, polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that specifically recognize and bind the protein product of a gene of interest can be made and isolated using known methods. In diagnosing malignancy, hyperplasia or metaplasia characterized by a differential expression of genes, one typically conducts a comparative analysis of the subject and appropriate controls.
  • a diagnostic test includes a control sample derived from a subject (hereinafter "positive control”), that exhibits the predicted change in expression of a gene of interest, e.g., at a level of at least 2.5 fold and clinical characteristics of the malignancy or metaplasia of interest.
  • a diagnosis also includes a control sample derived from a subject (hereinafter "positive control")
  • negative control that lacks the clinical characteristics of the neoplastic state and whose expression level of the gene at question is within a normal range.
  • a positive correlation between the subject and the positive control with respect to the identified alterations indicates the presence of or a predisposition to said disease.
  • a lack of correlation between the subject and the negative control confirms the diagnosis, hi a preferred embodiment, the method is used for diagnosing lung cancer, preferably non- small lung cancer, on the basis of a differential expression of a gene of Table 1.
  • determination of the mRNA level of the aforementioned genes may involve, in one aspect, measuring the amount of mRNA in a sample isolated from the lung cell by hybridization or quantitative amplification using at least one oligonucleotide probe that is complementary to the mRNA. Determination of the aforementioned gene products requires measuring the amount of immunospecific binding that occurs between an antibody reactive to the gene product of a gene identified in Table 1. To detect and quantify the immunospecific binding, or signals generated during hybridization or amplification procedures, digital image analysis systems including but not limited to those that detect radioactivity of the probes or chemiluminescence can be employed.
  • the present invention also provides a screen for identifying leads, drugs, therapeutic biologies, and methods for reversing the neoplastic condition of the cells or selectively inhibiting growth or proliferation of the cells described above.
  • the screen identifies lead compounds or biological agents which are useful for the treatment of malignancy, hyperplasia or metaplasia characterized by differential expression of a gene identified in Table 1.
  • suitable cell cultures or tissue cultures are first provided.
  • the cell can be a cultured cell or a genetically modified cell which differentially expresses a gene associated with a neoplastic lung cell e.g., at least one gene identified in Table 1.
  • the cells can be from a tissue biopsy.
  • the cells are cultured under conditions (temperature, growth or culture medium and gas (CO 2 )) and for an appropriate amount of time to attain exponential proliferation without density dependent constraints. It also is desirable to maintain an additional separate cell culture; one which does not receive the agent being tested as a control.
  • the method can be modified for high throughput analysis and suitable cells may be cultured in microtiter plates and several agents may be assayed at the same time by noting genotypic changes, phenotypic changes and/or cell death.
  • the agent is a composition other than a DNA or RNA nucleic acid molecule
  • the suitable conditions comprise directly added to the cell culture or added to culture medium for addition.
  • the screen involves contacting the agent with a test cell characterized by differential expression of a gene of interest and then assaying the cell for the level of said gene expression. In some aspects, it may be necessary to determine the level of gene expression prior to the assay. This provides a base line to compare expression after administration of the agent to the cell culture.
  • the test cell is a cultured cell from an established cell line that differentially expresses a gene of interest.
  • an agent is a possible therapeutic agent if gene expression is returned (reduced or increased) to a level that is present in a cell in a normal or non-neoplastic state, or the cell selectively dies, or exhibits reduced rate of growth.
  • the test cell or tissue sample is isolated from the subject to be treated and one or more potential agents are screened to determine the optimal therapeutic and/or course of treatment for that individual patient.
  • an "agent" is intended to include, but not be limited to a biological or chemical compound such as a simple or complex organic or inorganic molecule, a peptide, a protein or an oligonucleotide.
  • oligomers such as oligopeptides and oligonucleotides
  • synthetic organic compounds based on various core structures, and these are also included in the term "agent”.
  • various natural sources can provide compounds for screening, such as plant or animal extracts, and the like. It should be understood, although not always explicitly stated that the agent is used alone or in combination with another agent, having the same or different biological activity as the agents identified by the inventive screen. The agents and methods also are intended to be combined with other therapies.
  • the term "reversing the neoplastic state of the cell” is intended to include apoptosis, necrosis or any other means of preventing cell division, reduced tumorigenicity, loss of pharmaceutical resistance, maturation, differentiation or reversion of the neoplastic phenotypes as described herein.
  • lung cells having differential expression of a gene of interest that results in the neoplastic state are suitably treated by this method. These cells can be identified by any method known in the art that allows for the identification of differential expression of the gene.
  • the agent is a nucleic acid, it can be added to the cell cultures by methods known in the art, which includes, but is not limited to calcium phosphate precipitation, microinjection or electroporation.
  • the nucleic acid can be incorporated into an expression or insertion vector for incorporation into the cells.
  • Vectors that contain both a promoter and a cloning site into which a polynucleotide can be operatively linked are well known in the art and briefly described infra.
  • Polynucleotides are inserted into vector genomes using methods well known in the art. For example, insert and vector DNA can be contacted, under suitable conditions, with a restriction enzyme to create complementary ends on each molecule that can pair with each other and be joined together with a ligase.
  • synthetic nucleic acid linkers can be ligated to the termini of restricted polynucleotide.
  • oligonucleotide containing a termination codon and an appropriate restriction site can be ligated for insertion into a vector containing, for example, some or all of the following: a selectable marker gene, such as the neomycin gene for selection of stable or transient transfectants in mammalian cells; enhancer/promoter sequences from the immediate early gene of human CMV for high levels of transcription; transcription termination and RNA processing signals from SV40 for mRNA stability; SV40 polyoma origins of replication and ColEl for proper episomal replication; versatile multiple cloning sites; and T7 and SP6 RNA promoters for in vitro transcription of sense and antisense RNA.
  • a selectable marker gene such as the neomycin gene for selection of stable or transient transfectants in mammalian cells
  • enhancer/promoter sequences from the immediate early gene of human CMV for high levels of transcription
  • transcription termination and RNA processing signals from SV40 for mRNA stability transcription termination and RNA processing signals
  • kits containing the agents and instructions necessary to perform the screen and in vitro method as described herein also are claimed.
  • a candidate agent is a potential drug if gene expression is returned to a normal level or if symptoms associated or correlated to the presence of cells containing differential expression of a gene of interest are ameliorated, each as compared to untreated, animal having the pathological cells. It also can be useful to have a separate negative control group of cells or animals which are healthy and not treated, which provides a basis for comparison.
  • THERAPEUTIC METHODS The proteins expressed by the genes described herein all have an extracellular component that can bind a ligand, such as a polyclonal or a monoclonal antibody as well as small molecules that bind to the extracellular portion of these receptors. Thus, these ligands are useful as therapeutic agents to inhibit growth or induce cytolysis or cell death of cells expressing these receptors.
  • Therapeutic agents also include immune effector cells that specifically recognize and lyse cells expressing a gene identified in Table 1. One can determine if a subject or patient will be beneficially treated by the use of these immune effector cells by screening one or more of the effector cells against tumor cells isolated from the subject or patient using methods known in the art.
  • the therapeutic agent is administered in an amount effective to treat lung cancer.
  • an agent of the invention is administered in an amount effective to treat cell lung cancer.
  • Therapeutics of the invention can also be used to prevent progression from a pre- neoplastic or non-malignant state into a neoplastic or a malignant state.
  • Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a therapeutic agent of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, expression by recombinant cells, receptor-mediated endocytosis (See, e.g., Wu and Wu, (1987), J. Biol. Chem.
  • compositions of the invention may be desirable to administer the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, by injection, or by means of a catheter.
  • the agents identified herein as effective for their intended purpose can be administered to subjects or individuals susceptible to or at risk of developing a disease correlated to the differential expression of a gene of Table 1.
  • the agent When the agent is administered to a subject such as a mouse, a rat or a human patient, the agent can be added to a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and systemically or topically administered to the subject.
  • a tumor sample is removed from the patient and the cells are assayed for the differential expression of the gene.
  • Therapeutic amounts can be empirically determined and will vary with the pathology being treated, the subject being treated and the efficacy and toxicity of the agent. When delivered to an animal, the method is useful to further confirm efficacy of the agent.
  • mice groups of nude mice (Balb/c NCR nu/nu female, Simonsen, Gilroy, CA) are each subcutaneously inoculated with about 10 5 to about 10 9 hyperproliferative, cancer or target cells as defined herein.
  • the agent is administered, for example, by subcutaneous injection around the tumor. Tumor measurements to determine reduction of tumor size are made in two dimensions using venier calipers twice a week. Other animal models may also be employed as appropriate.
  • Administration in vivo can be effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently throughout the course of treatment.
  • compositions used for therapy are well known to those of skill in the art and will vary with the composition used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations can be carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician. Suitable dosage formulations and methods of administering the agents can be found below.
  • the agents and compositions of the present invention can be used in the manufacture of medicaments and for the treatment of humans and other animals by administration in accordance with conventional procedures, such as an active ingredient in pharmaceutical compositions.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered orally, intranasally, parenterally or by inhalation therapy, and may take the form of tablets, lozenges, granules, capsules, pills, ampoules, suppositories or aerosol form. They may also take the form of suspensions, solutions and emulsions of the active ingredient in aqueous or nonaqueous diluents, syrups, granulates or powders. Ln addition to an agent of the present invention, the pharmaceutical compositions can also contain other pharmaceutically active compounds or a plurality of compounds of the invention.
  • an agent of the present invention also referred to herein as the active ingredient
  • the preferred route will vary with the condition and age of the recipient, and the disease being treated.
  • the agent should be administered to achieve peak concentrations of the active compound at sites of disease. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of the agent, optionally in saline, or orally administered, for example, as a tablet, capsule or syrup containing the active ingredient.
  • Desirable blood levels of the agent may be maintained by a continuous infusion to provide a therapeutic amount of the active ingredient within disease tissue.
  • the use of operative combinations is contemplated to provide therapeutic combinations requiring a lower total dosage of each component antiviral agent than may be required when each individual therapeutic compound or drug is used alone, thereby reducing adverse effects.
  • the agent While it is possible for the agent to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical formulation comprising at least one active ingredient, as defined above, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers therefor and optionally other therapeutic agents.
  • Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient.
  • Formulations include those suitable for oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including transdermal, buccal and sublingual), vaginal, parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) and pulmonary administration.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then if necessary shaping the product.
  • Formulations of the present invention suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion.
  • the active ingredient may also be presented a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free- flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder (e.g.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile.
  • Tablets may optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions for topical administration according to the present invention may be formulated as an ointment, cream, suspension, lotion, powder, solution, past, gel, spray, aerosol or oil.
  • a formulation may comprise a patch or a dressing such as a bandage or adhesive plaster impregnated with active ingredients and optionally one or more excipients or diluents.
  • the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane- 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • the topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the agent through the skin or other affected areas.
  • the oily phase of the emulsions of this invention may be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While this phase may comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), it desirably comprises a mixture of at lease one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat.
  • Emulgents and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the present invention include Tween 60, Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulphate.
  • suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties, since the solubility of the active compound in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations is very low.
  • the cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non-staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers.
  • Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the agent.
  • Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the agent, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations suitable for nasal administration wherein the carrier is a solid, include a coarse powder having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which is administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e., by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose.
  • Suitable formulations wherein the carrier is a liquid for administration as, for example, nasal spray, nasal drops, or by aerosol administration by nebulizer include aqueous or oily solutions of the agent.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non- aqueous isotonic sterile injection solutions which may contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents, and liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the compound to blood components or one or more organs.
  • the formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described.
  • Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit, daily subdose, as herein above-recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of an agent.
  • the formulations of this invention may include other agents conventional in the art having regard to the type of formulation in question, for example, those suitable for oral administration may include such further agents as sweeteners, thickeners and flavoring agents. It also is intended that the agents, compositions and methods of this invention be combined with other suitable compositions and therapies.
  • the genes of Table 1 can be used to generate transgenic animal models.
  • geneticists have succeeded in creating transgenic animals, for example mice, by manipulating the genes of developing embryos and introducing foreign genes into these embryos. Once these genes have integrated into the genome of the recipient embryo, the resulting embryos or adult animals can be analyzed to determine the function of the gene.
  • the mutant animals are produced to understand the function of known genes in vivo and to create animal models of human diseases. (See, e.g., Chisaka et al. (1992) 355:516-520; Joyner et al.
  • Antibodies useful in the methods of this invention are polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies. They can be chimeric, humanized, or totally human. A functional fragment of an antibody includes but is not limited to Fab, Fab', Fab2, Fab'2, and single chain variable regions. Antibodies can be produced in cell culture, in phage, or in various animals, including but not limited to cows, rabbits, goats, mice, rats, hamsters, guinea pigs, sheep, dogs, cats, monkeys, chimpanzees, apes, etc.
  • Antibodies can be tested for specificity of binding by comparing binding to appropriate antigen to binding to irrelevant antigen or antigen mixture under a given set of conditions. If the antibody binds to the appropriate antigen at least 2, 5, 7, and preferably 10 times more than to irrelevant antigen or antigen mixture then it is considered to be specific.
  • the monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be generated using conventional hybridoma techniques known in the art and well-described in the literature.
  • a hybridoma is produced by fusing a suitable immortal cell line (e.g., a myeloma cell line such as, but not limited to, Sp2/0, Sp2/0-AG14, NSO, NS1, NS2, AE-1, L.5, >243, P3X63Ag8.653, Sp2 SA3, Sp2 MAI, Sp2 SSI, Sp2 SA5, U397, MLA 144, ACT IV, MOLT4, DA-1, JURKAT, WEHI, K-562, COS, RAJI, NIH 3T3, HL-60, MLA 144, NAMAIWA, NEURO 2A, CHO, PerC.6, YB2/O) or the like, or heteromyelomas, fusion products thereof, or any cell or fusion cell derived therefrom, or any other suitable cell line as known in the art (see, e.g., www.atcc.org, www.lifetech.com., and the like), with antibody producing cells, such
  • Antibody producing cells can also be obtained from the peripheral blood or, preferably the spleen or lymph nodes, of humans or other suitable animals that have been immunized with the antigen of interest. Any other suitable host cell can also be used for expressing-heterologous or endogenous nucleic acid encoding an antibody, specified fragment or variant thereof, of the present invention.
  • the fused cells (hybridomas) or recombinant cells can be isolated using selective culture conditions or other suitable known methods, and cloned by limiting dilution or cell sorting, or other known methods.
  • Suitable methods of producing or isolating antibodies of the requisite specificity can be used, including, but not limited to, methods that select recombinant antibody from a peptide or protein library (e.g., but not limited to, a bacteriophage, ribosome, oligonucleotide, RNA, cDNA, or the like, display library; e.g., as available from various commercial vendors such as Cambridge Antibody Technologies
  • Antibody variants of the present invention can also be prepared using delivering a polynucleotide encoding an antibody of this invention to a suitable host such as to provide transgenic animals or mammals, such as goats, cows, horses, sheep, and the like, that produce such antibodies in their milk. These methods are known in the art and are described for example in U.S. Pat Nos. 5,827,690; 5,849,992; 4,873,316; 5,849,992; 5,994,616; 5,565,362; and 5,304,489.
  • the term "antibody variant” includes post-translational modification to linear polypeptide sequence of the antibody or fragment. For example, U.S. Patent No.
  • 6,602,684 Bl describes a method for the generation of modified glycol-forms of antibodies, including whole antibody molecules, antibody fragments, or fusion proteins that include a region equivalent to the Fc region of an immunoglobulin, having enhanced Fc-mediated cellular toxicity, and glycoproteins so generated.
  • Antibody variants also can be prepared by delivering a polynucleotide of this invention to provide transgenic plants and cultured plant cells (e.g., but not limited to tobacco, maize, and duckweed) that produce such antibodies, specified portions or variants in the plant parts or in cells cultured therefrom.
  • transgenic plants and cultured plant cells e.g., but not limited to tobacco, maize, and duckweed
  • transgenic tobacco leaves expressing large amounts of recombinant proteins, e.g., using an inducible promoter.
  • Transgenic maize have been used to express mammalian proteins at commercial production levels, with biological activities equivalent to those produced in other recombinant systems or purified from natural sources. See, e.g., Hood et al, Adv. Exp. Med. Biol. (1999) 464:127-147 and references cited therein.
  • Antibody variants have also been produced in large amounts from transgenic plant seeds including antibody fragments, such as single chain antibodies (scFv's), including tobacco seeds and potato tubers. See, e.g., Conrad et al.(1998) Plant Mol.
  • antibodies of the present invention can also be produced using transgenic plants, according to know methods.
  • Antibody derivatives can be produced, for example, by adding exogenous sequences to modify immunogenicity or reduce, enhance or modify binding, affinity, on-rate, off-rate, avidity, specificity, half-life, or any other suitable characteristic.
  • the non-human or human CDR sequences are maintained while the non-human sequences of the variable and constant regions are replaced with human or other amino acids.
  • the CDR residues are directly and most substantially involved in influencing antigen binding.
  • Humanization or engineering of antibodies of the present invention can be performed using any known method, such as but not limited to those described in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • Fully human antibody sequences are made in a transgenic mouse which has been engineered to express human heavy and light chain antibody genes. Multiple strains of such transgenic mice have been made which can produce different classes of antibodies. B cells from transgenic mice which are producing a desirable antibody can be fused to make hybridoma cell lines for continuous production of the desired antibody.
  • Human monoclonal antibodies can also be produced by a hybridoma which includes a B cell obtained from a transgenic nonhuman animal, e.g., a transgenic mouse, having a genome comprising a human heavy chain transgene and a light chain transgene fused to an immortalized cell. These antibodies can be modified to create chimeric antibodies. Chimeric antibodies are those in which the various domains of the antibodies' heavy and light chains are coded for by DNA from more than one species. See, e.g., U.S. Patent No.: 4,816,567.
  • antibody derivative also includes “diabodies” which are small antibody fragments with two antigen-binding sites, wherein fragments comprise a heavy chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light chain variable domain (V L ) in the same polypeptide chain (VH V_).
  • VH heavy chain variable domain
  • V L light chain variable domain
  • VH V_ polypeptide chain
  • antibody derivative further includes "linear antibodies".
  • linear antibodies The procedure for making the is known in the art and described in Zapata et al. (1995) Protein Eng. 8(10):1057-1062. Briefly, these antibodies comprise a pair of tandem Fd segments (V H -C H 1-VH -C H I) which form a pair of antigen binding regions. Linear antibodies can be bispecific or monospecific.
  • the antibodies of this invention can be recovered and purified from recombinant cell cultures by known methods including, but not limited to, protein A purification, ammonium sulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cation exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography and lectin chromatography. High performance liquid chromatography (“HPLC”) can also be used for purification.
  • Antibodies of the present invention include naturally purified products, products of chemical synthetic procedures, and products produced by recombinant techniques from a eukaryotic host, including, for example, yeast, higher plant, insect and mammalian cells, or alternatively from a prokaryotic cells as described above.
  • antibodies can be labeled with a detectable moiety such as a radioactive atom, a chromophore, a fluorophore, or the like.
  • a detectable moiety such as a radioactive atom, a chromophore, a fluorophore, or the like.
  • Such labeled antibodies can be used for diagnostic techniques, either in vivo, or in an isolated test sample.
  • Antibodies can also be conjugated, for example, to a pharmaceutical agent, such as chemotherapeutic drug or a toxin. They can be linked to a cytokine, to a ligand, to another antibody.
  • Suitable agents for coupling to antibodies to achieve an anti-tumor effect include cytokines, such as interleukin 2 (IL- 2) and Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF); photosensitizers, for use in photodynamic therapy, including aluminum (III) phthalocyanine tetrasulfonate, hematoporphyrin, and phthalocyanine; radionuclides, such as iodine-131 ( 131 I), yttrium-90 ( 90 Y), bismuth-212 ( 212 Bi), bismuth-213 ( 213 Bi), technetium-99m ( 99m Tc), rhenium- 186 ( 186 Re), and rhenium-188 ( 188 Re); antibiotics, such as doxorubicin, adriamycin, daunorubicin, methotrexate, daunomycin, neocarzinostatin, and carboplatin; bacterial, plant, and other toxins, such as diphth
  • preparations containing antibodies covalently linked to organic molecules they can be prepared using suitable methods, such as by reaction with one or more modifying agents.
  • modifying agents refers to a suitable organic group (e.g., hydrophilic polymer, a fatty acid, a fatty acid ester) that comprises an activating group. Specific examples of these are provided supra.
  • An "activating group” is a chemical moiety or functional group that can, under appropriate conditions, react with a second chemical group thereby forming a covalent bond between the modifying agent and the second chemical group.
  • electrophilic groups such as tosylate, mesylate, halo (chloro, bromo, fluoro, iodo), N- hydroxysuccinimidyl esters (NHS), and the like.
  • Activating groups that can react with thiols include, for example, maleimide, iodoacetyl, acrylolyl, pyridyl disulf ⁇ des, 5- thiol-2-nitrobenzoic acid thiol (TNB-thiol), and the like.
  • An aldehyde functional group can be coupled to amine- or hydrazide-containing molecules, and an azide group can react with a trivalent phosphorous group to form phosphoramidate or phosphorimide linkages.
  • Suitable methods to introduce activating groups into molecules are known in the art. See for example, Hermanson, G. T., BIOCONJUGATE TECHNIQUES, Academic Press: San Diego, Calif. (1996).
  • An activating group can be bonded directly to the organic group (e.g., hydrophilic polymer, fatty acid, fatty acid ester), or through a linker moiety, for example a divalent group wherein one or more carbon atoms can be replaced by a heteroatom such as oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur.
  • Suitable linker moieties include, for example, tetraethylene glycol.
  • Modifying agents that comprise a linker moiety can be produced, for example, by reacting a mono-Boc-alkyldiamine (e.g., mono-Boc- ethylenediamine, mono-Boc-diaminohexane) with a fatty acid in the presence of 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopro ⁇ yl)carbodiimide (EDC) to form an amide bond between the free amine and the fatty acid carboxylate.
  • a mono-Boc-alkyldiamine e.g., mono-Boc- ethylenediamine, mono-Boc-diaminohexane
  • EDC 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopro ⁇ yl)carbodiimide
  • the Boc protecting group can be removed from the product by treatment with trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) to expose a primary amine that can be coupled to another carboxylate as described, or can be reacted with aleic anhydride and the resulting product cyclized to produce an activated maleimido derivative of the fatty acid.
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • the modified antibodies of the invention can be produced by reacting a human antibody or antigen-binding fragment with a modifying agent.
  • the organic moieties can be bonded to the antibody in a non-site specific manner by employing an amine-reactive modifying agent, for example, an NHS ester of PEG.
  • Modified human antibodies or antigen-binding fragments can also be prepared by reducing disulfide bonds (e.g., intra-chain disulfide bonds) of an antibody or antigen- binding fragment. The reduced antibody or antigen-binding fragment can then be reacted with a thiol-reactive modifying agent to produce the modified antibody of the invention.
  • Modified human antibodies and antigen-binding fragments comprising an organic moiety that is bonded to specific sites of an antibody of the present invention can be prepared using suitable methods, such as reverse proteolysis. See generally, Hermanson, G. T., BIOCONJUGATE TECHNIQUES, Academic Press: San Diego, Calif. (1996).
  • the antibodies of the invention also can be bound to many different carriers.
  • compositions containing the antibodies and another substance, active or inert are also provided.
  • carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, agaroses and magnetite.
  • the nature of the carrier can be either soluble or insoluble for purposes of the invention.
  • suitable carriers for binding monoclonal antibodies or will be able to ascertain such, using routine experimentation.
  • Compositions containing the antibodies, fragments thereof or cell lines which produce the antibodies are encompassed by this invention. When these compositions are to be used pharmaceutically, they are combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the present invention provides a method of inducing an immune response comprising delivering the compounds and compositions of the invention in the context of an MHC molecule.
  • the polypeptides of this invention can be pulsed into antigen presenting cells using the methods described herein.
  • Antigen-presenting cells include, but are not limited to dendritic cells (DCs), monocytes/macrophages, B lymphocytes or other cell type(s) expressing the necessary MHC/co-stimulatory molecules.
  • DCs dendritic cells
  • monocytes/macrophages include, but are not limited to dendritic cells (DCs), monocytes/macrophages, B lymphocytes or other cell type(s) expressing the necessary MHC/co-stimulatory molecules.
  • DCs dendritic cells
  • monocytes/macrophages include, but are not limited to monocytes/macrophages, B lymphocytes or other cell type(s) expressing the necessary MHC/co-stimulatory molecules.
  • Isolated host cells which present the polypeptides of this invention in the context of MHC molecules are further useful to expand and isolate a population of educated, antigen-specific immune effector cells.
  • the irnmune effector cells e.g., cytotoxic T lymphocytes
  • the population can be purified using methods known in the art, e.g., FACS analysis or ficoll gradient.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions comprising the cells and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are useful in adoptive immunotherapy.
  • the immune effector cells Prior to administration in vivo, the immune effector cells are screened in vitro for their ability to lyse tumor cells
  • the immune effector cells and/or the APCs are genetically modified.
  • genes coding for co-stimulatory molecules and/or stimulatory cytokines can be inserted prior to, concurrent to or subsequent to expansion of the immune effector cells.
  • This invention also provides methods of inducing an immune response in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amoimt of a polypeptide described above under the conditions that induce an immune response to the polypeptide.
  • the polypeptide can be administered in a formulation or as a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide.
  • the polynucleotide can be administered in a gene delivery vehicle or by inserting into a host cell which in turn recombinantly transcribes, translates and processed the encoded polypeptide.
  • Isolated host cells containing the polynucleotides of this invention in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can therefore be combined with appropriate and effective amount of an adjuvant, cytokine or co-stimulatory molecule for an effective vaccine regimen.
  • the host cell is an APC such as a dendritic cell.
  • the host cell can be further modified by inserting of a polynucleotide coding for an effective amount of either or both a cytokine and/or a co-stimulatory molecule.
  • compositions containing any of the above- mentioned proteins, polypeptides, polynucleotides, vectors, cells, antibodies and fragments thereof, and an acceptable solid or liquid carrier.
  • compositions are used pharmaceutically, they are combined with a "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" for diagnostic and therapeutic use.
  • the APC are precommitted or mature dendritic cells which can be isolated from the white blood cell fraction of a mammal, such as a murine, simian or a human (See, e.g., WO 96/23060).
  • the white blood cell fraction can be from the peripheral blood of the mammal.
  • This method includes the following steps: (a) providing a white blood cell fraction obtained from a mammalian source by methods known in the art such as leukapheresis; (b) separating the white blood cell fraction of step (a) into four or more subtractions by countercurrent centrifugal elutriation; (c) stimulating conversion of monocytes in one or more fractions from step (b) to dendritic cells by contacting the cells with calcium ionophore, GM-CSF and IL-13 or GM-CSF and IL-4, (d) identifying the dendritic cell-enriched fraction from step (c); and (e) collecting the enriched fraction of step (d), is performed at about 4°C.
  • the white blood cell fraction can be treated with calcium ionophore in the presence of other cytokines, such as recombinant (rh) rhIL-12, rhGM-CSF, or rhIL-4.
  • the cells of the white blood cell fraction can be washed in buffer and suspended in Ca ⁇ /Mg "1"4" free media prior to the separating step.
  • the white blood cell fraction can be obtained by leukapheresis.
  • the dendritic cells can be identified by the presence of at least one of the following markers: HLA-DR, HLA- DQ, or B7.
  • CD3, CD14, CD16, 56, 57, and CD 19, 20 Monoclonal antibodies specific to these cell surface markers are commercially available. More specifically, the method requires collecting an enriched collection of white cells and platelets from leukapheresis that is then further fractionated by countercurrent centrifugal elutriation (CCE) (Abrahamsen T.G. et al. (1991) J. Clin. Apheresis. 6:48-53). Cell samples are placed in a special elutriation rotor. The rotor is then spun at a constant speed of, for example, 3000 rpm. Once the rotor has reached the desired speed, pressurized air is used to control the flow rate of cells.
  • CCE countercurrent centrifugal elutriation
  • Cells in the elutriator are subjected to simultaneous centrifugation and a washout stream of buffer that is constantly increasing in flow rate. This results in fractional cell separations based largely but not exclusively on differences in cell size.
  • Quality control of APC and more specifically DC collection and confirmation of their successful activation in culture is dependent upon a simultaneous multi-color FACS analysis technique which monitors both monocytes and the dendritic cell subpopulation as well as possible contaminant T lymphocytes. It is based upon the fact that DCs do not express the following markers: CD3 (T cell); CD14 (monocyte); CD16, 56, 57 (NK/LAK cells); CD19, 20 (B cells).
  • DCs do express large quantities of HLA-DR, significant HLA-DQ and B7.2 (but little or no B7.1) at the time they are circulating in the blood (in addition they express Leu M7 and M9, myeloid markers which are also expressed by monocytes and neutrophils).
  • PI propidium iodide
  • Color #1 CD3 alone, CD14 alone, etc.; Leu M7 or Leu M9; anti-Class I, etc.
  • Color #2 HLA-DQ, B7.1, B7.2, CD25 (IL2r), ICAM, LFA-3, etc.
  • the goal of FACS analysis at the time of collection is to confirm that the DCs are enriched in the expected fractions, to monitor neutrophil contamination, and to make sure that appropriate markers are expressed.
  • This rapid bulk collection of enriched DCs from human peripheral blood, suitable for clinical applications is absolutely dependent on the analytic FACS technique described above for quality control. If need be, mature DCs can be immediately separated from monocytes at this point by fluorescent sorting for "cocktail negative" cells. It may not be necessary to routinely separate DCs from monocytes because, as will be detailed below, the monocytes themselves are still capable of differentiating into DCs or functional DC- like cells in culture.
  • the DC rich/monocyte APC fractions (usually 150 through 190) can be pooled and cryopreserved for future use, or immediately placed in short term culture.
  • the DC rich/monocyte APC fractions (usually 150 through 190) can be pooled and cryopreserved for future use, or immediately placed in short term culture.
  • others have reported a method for upregulating (activating) dendritic cells and converting monocytes to an activated dendritic cell phenotype. This method involves the addition of calcium ionophore to the culture media to convert monocytes into activated dendritic cells.
  • cytokines include but are not limited to purified or recombinant ("rh") rhGM-CSF, rhIL-2, and rhIL-4. Each cytokine when given alone is inadequate for optimal upregulation.
  • Antigen-presenting cells can consist of dendritic cells (DCs), monocytes/macrophages, B lymphocytes or other cell type(s) expressing the necessary MHC/co-stimulatory molecules.
  • DCs dendritic cells
  • monocytes/macrophages monocytes/macrophages
  • B lymphocytes or other cell type(s) expressing the necessary MHC/co-stimulatory molecules.
  • the methods described below focus primarily on DCs which are the most potent, preferred APCs. Pulsing is accomplished in vitro/ex vivo by exposing APCs to the antigenic protein or peptide(s) of this invention.
  • the protein or peptide(s) is added to APCs at a concentration of 1-10 ⁇ m for approximately 3 hours.
  • Pulsed APCs can subsequently be administered to the host via an intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery.
  • Protein/peptide antigen can also be delivered in vivo with adjuvant via the intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery.
  • Foster APCs are derived from the human cell line 174xCEM.T2, referred to as T2, which contains a mutation in its antigen processing pathway that restricts the association of endogenous peptides with cell surface MHC class I molecules (Zweerink et al. (1993) J. Immunol. 150:1763-1771). This is due to a large homozygous deletion in the MHC class II region encompassing the genes TAP1, TAP2, LMP1, and LMP2, which are required for antigen presentation to MHC class 1 -restricted CD8 + CTLs. In effect, only "empty" MHC class I molecules are presented on the surface of these cells.
  • T2 cells Exogenous peptide added to the culture medium binds to these MHC molecules provided that the peptide contains the allele- specific binding motif.
  • These T2 cells are referred to herein as "foster" APCs. They can be used in conjunction with this invention to present antigen(s). Transduction of T2 cells with specific recombinant MHC alleles allows for redirection of the MHC restriction profile. Libraries tailored to the recombinant allele will be preferentially presented by them because the anchor residues will prevent efficient binding to the endogenous allele. High level expression of MHC molecules makes the APC more visible to the CTLs.
  • CMN promoter a powerful transcriptional promoter
  • immunogenicity of therapeutic agents of this invention can be determined by known methodologies including, but not limited to those exemplified below, hi one embodiment, such methodology may be employed to compare an equivalent polypeptide ligand of the invention with the corresponding native ligand. For example, an altered ligand may be considered "more active” if it compares favorably with the activity of the native ligand in any one of the following assays. For some purposes, one skilled in the art will select an immunogenic ligand which displays more activity than another immunogenic ligand, i.e., for treatment and/or diagnostic purposes.
  • an immunogenic ligand which is comparable with the native ligand will be suitable, hi other situations, it may be desirable to utilize an immunogenic ligand which is less active. It has been suggested that such levels of activity positively correlate with the level of immunogenicity.
  • the 51 Cr-release lysis assay Lysis of peptide-pulsed 51 Cr-labeled targets by antigen-specific T cells can be compared for target cells pulsed with either the native or altered ligands. Functionally enhanced ligands will show greater lysis of targets as a function of time. The kinetics of lysis as well as overall target lysis at a fixed timepoint (e.g., 4 hours) may be used to evaluate ligand performance. (Ware C.F.
  • Cytokine-release assay Analysis of the types and quantities of cytokines secreted by T cells upon contacting ligand-pulsed targets can be a measure of functional activity. Cytokines can be measured by ELISA or ELISPOT assays to determine the rate and total amount of cytokine production. (Fujihashi K. et al. (1993) J. Immunol. Meth. 160:181; Tanguay S. and Killion J.J. (1994) Lymphokine Cytokine Res. 13:259). 3. In vitro T cell education.
  • the ligands of the invention can be compared to the corresponding native ligand for the ability to elicit ligand-reactive T cell populations from normal donor or patient-derived PBMC.
  • elicited T cells can be tested for lytic activity, cytokine-release, polyclonality, and cross- reactivity to the native ligand.
  • Parkhurst M.R. et al. (1996) J. Immunol. 157:2539).
  • Transgenic animal models Immunogenicity can be assessed in vivo by vaccinating HLA transgenic mice with either the ligands of the invention or the native ligand and determining the nature and magnitude of the induced immune response.
  • the hu-PBL-SCID mouse model allows reconstitution of a human immune system in a mouse by adoptive transfer of human PBL.
  • These animals may be vaccinated with the ligands and analyzed for immune response as previously mentioned.
  • These animals may be vaccinated with the ligands and analyzed for immune response as previously mentioned.
  • Proliferation T cells will proliferate in response to reactive ligands. Proliferation can be monitored quantitatively by measuring, for example, 3 H- thymidine uptake. (Caruso A. et al. (1997) Cytometry 27:71). 6. Tetramer staining.
  • MHC tetramers can be loaded with individual ligands and tested for their relative abilities to bind to appropriate effector T cell populations. (Altman J.D. et al. (1996) Science 274(5284):94-96). 7. MHC Stabilization. Exposure of certain cell lines such as T2 cells to
  • HLA-binding ligands results in the stabilization of MHC complexes on the cell surface. Quantitation of MHC complexes on the cell surface has been correlated with the affinity of the ligand for the HLA allele that is stabilized. Thus, this technique can determine the relative HLA affinity of ligand epitopes.
  • MHC competition The ability of a ligand to interfere with the functional activity of a reference ligand and its cognate T cell effectors is a measure of how well a ligand can compete for MHC binding. Measuring the relative levels of inhibition is an indicator of MHC affinity. (Feltkamp M.C. et al. (1995) hnmunol. Lett. 47:1). 9. Primate models. A recently described non-human primate
  • chimpanzee model system can be utilized to monitor in vivo immunogenicities of HLA-restricted ligands. It has been demonstrated that chimpanzees share overlapping MHC-ligand specificities with human MHC molecules thus allowing one to test HLA-restricted ligands for relative in vivo immunogenicity. (Bertoni R. et al. (1998) J. Immunol. 161:4447). 10. Monitoring TCR Signal Transduction Events. Several intracellular signal transduction events (e.g., phosphorylation) are associated with successful TCR engagement by MHC-ligand complexes. The qualitative and quantitative analysis of these events have been correlated with the relative abilities of ligands to activate effector cells through TCR engagement. (Salazar E. et al. (2000) Int. J. Cancer 85:829; Isakov N. et al. (1995) J. Exp. Med. 181:375).
  • the present invention makes use of these APCs to stimulate production of an enriched population of antigen-specific immune effector cells.
  • the antigen-specific immune effector cells are expanded at the expense of the APCs, which die in the culture.
  • the process by which na ⁇ ve immune effector cells become educated by other cells is described essentially in Coulie (1997) Molec. Med. Today 3:261-268.
  • the APCs prepared as described above are mixed with na ⁇ ve immune effector cells.
  • the cells may be cultured in the presence of a cytokine, for example IL-2.
  • the culture conditions are such that the antigen- specific immune effector cells expand (i.e., proliferate) at a much higher rate than the APCs. Multiple infusions of APCs and optional cytokines can be performed to further expand the population of antigen-specific cells.
  • the immune effector cells are T cells.
  • the immune effector cells can be genetically modified by transduction with a transgene coding for example, IL-2, IL-11 or IL-13.
  • APCs can be transduced with viral vectors encoding a relevant polypeptides.
  • the most common viral vectors include recombinant poxvirases such as vaccinia and fowlpox virus (Bronte et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:3183-3188; Kim et al. (1997) J. hnmunother. 20:276-286) and as an example adenovirus (Arthur et al. (1997) J. Immunol. 159:1393-1403; Wan et al.
  • the antibodies can be conjugated to an enzyme (e.g., HRP) giving rise to a colored product upon reaction with the substrate.
  • HRP enzyme
  • the actual amount of antigenic polypeptides being expressed by the APCs can be evaluated by ELISA.
  • Transduced APCs can subsequently be administered to the host via an intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery.
  • In vivo transduction of DCs, or other APCs can be accomplished by administration of Ad (or other viral vectors) via different routes including intravenous, intramuscular, intranasal, intraperitoneal or cutaneous delivery.
  • the method is cutaneous delivery of Ad vector at multiple sites using a total dose of approximately lxlO IO -lx 10 12 i.u.
  • Levels of in vivo transduction can be roughly assessed by co-staining with antibodies directed against APC marker(s) and the TAA being expressed.
  • the staining procedure can be carried out on biopsy samples from the site of administration or on cells from draining lymph nodes or other organs where APCs (in particular DCs) may have migrated (Condon et al. (1996) Nature Med. 2:1122-1128 and Wan et al. (1997) Hum. Gene Ther. 8:1355-1363).
  • DCs can also be transduced in vitro/ex vivo by non- viral gene delivery methods such as electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitation or cationic lipid/plasmid DNA complexes (Arthur et al. (1997) Cancer Gene Ther. 4:17-25).
  • Transduced APCs can subsequently be administered to the host via an intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery.
  • DCs In vivo transduction of DCs, or other APCs, can potentially be accomplished by administration of cationic lipid/plasmid DNA complexes delivered via the intravenous, intramuscular, intranasal, intraperitoneal or cutaneous route of administration.
  • Gene gun delivery or injection of naked plasmid DNA into the skin also leads to transduction of DCs (Condon et al. (1996) Nature Med. 2:1122-1128; Raz et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:9519-9523).
  • Intramuscular delivery of plasmid DNA may also be used for immunization (Rosato et al. (1997) Hum. Gene Ther.
  • Adoptive Immunotherapy and Vaccines The expanded populations of antigen-specific immune effector cells of the present invention also find use in adoptive immunotherapy regimes and as vaccines.
  • Adoptive immunotherapy methods involve, in one aspect, administering to a subject a substantially pure population of educated, antigen-specific immune effector cells made by culturing na ⁇ ve immune effector cells with APCs as described above.
  • the APCs are dendritic cells.
  • the adoptive immunotherapy methods described herein are autologous. In this case, the APCs are made using parental cells isolated from a single subject.
  • the expanded population also employs T cells isolated from that subject.
  • the expanded population of antigen-specific cells is administered to the same patient.
  • an effective amount, APCs or immune effector cells are administered with an effective amount of a stimulatory cytokine, such as IL-2 or a co-stimulatory molecule.
  • a stimulatory cytokine such as IL-2 or a co-stimulatory molecule.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides methods for aiding in the diagnoses of the condition of a lung cell, and methods of screening for a potential therapeutic agents for cytolysis or apoptosis of lung cancer cells.

Description

COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS TO DIAGNOSE AND TREAT LUNG CANCER
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS This application claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 (e) to U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/526,528, filed December 2, 2003, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference into the present disclosure.
TECHNICAL FIELD This invention is in the field of cancer biology. In particular, the present invention provides compositions and methods for identifying a neoplastic lung cell. It also provides compositions and methods to inhibit the growth, of neoplastic lung cells identified by these methods.
BACKGROUND Despite numerous advances in medical research, cancer remains the second leading cause of death in the United States. In the industrialized nations, roughly one in five persons will die of cancer. Traditional modes of clinical care, such as surgical resection, radiotherapy and chemotherapy, have a significant failure rate, especially for solid tumors. Failure occurs either because the initial tumor is unresponsive or because of recurrence due to regrowth at the original site and/or metastases. Lung cancer is one of the most common malignancies worldwide and is the second leading cause of cancer death in man. See, American Cancer Society, Cancer Facts and Figures, 1996, Atlanta. Approximately 178,100 new cases of lung cancer were diagnosed in 1997, accounting for 13% of cancer diagnoses. An estimated 160,400 deaths due to lung cancer would occur in 1997 accounting for 29% of all cancer deaths. The one-year survival rates for lung cancer have increased from 32% in 1973 to 41% in 1993, largely due to improvements in surgical techniques. The 5 year survival rate for all stages combined is only 14%. The survival rate is 48% for cases detected when the disease is still localized, but only 15% of lung cancers are discovered that early. Among various forms of lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) accounts for nearly 80% of all new lung cancer cases each year. For patients diagnosed with NSCLC, surgical resection offers the only chance of meaningful survival. On the other hand, small cell lung cancer is the most malignant and fastest growing form of lung cancer and accounts for the rest of approximately 20% of new cases of lung cancer. The primary tumor is generally responsive to chemotherapy, but is followed by wide-spread metastasis. The median survival time at diagnosis is approximately 1 year, with a 5 year survival rate of 5%. hi spite of major advances in cancer therapy including improvements in surgical resection, radiation treatment and chemotherapy, successful intervention for lung cancer in particular, relies on early detection of the cancerous cells. Neoplasia resulting in benign tumors may be completely cured by removing the mass surgically. If a tumor becomes malignant, as manifested by invasion of surrounding tissue, it becomes much more difficult to eradicate. Therefore, there remains a considerable need in the art for the development of methods for detecting the disease at the early stage. There also exists a pressing need in the art for developing diagnostic methods to monitor or prognose the progression of the disease as well as methods to treat various related pathological conditions. This invention satisfies these needs and provides related advantages as well.
DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides methods for aiding in the diagnosis of the condition of a lung cell, for identifying and/or distinguishing normal and neoplastic lung cells and for identifying potential therapeutic agents to induce cytolysis, apoptosis or death of and/or ameliorate the symptoms associated with the presence of neoplastic lung cells in a subject. Further provided are compositions and methods to induce cytolysis, apoptosis or death of neoplastic lung cells and/or ameliorate the symptoms associated with neoplastic lung cells in vivo. Accordingly, one embodiment is a method for diagnosing the condition of a lung cell by screening for the presence of a differentially expressed gene isolated from a sample containing or suspected of containing a lung cell, in which the differential expression of the gene is indicative of the neoplastic state of the lung cell. In one aspect, the gene is expressed more in a neoplastic squamous lung cell or a lung tumor cell as compared to normal lung cell, and is selected from Porimin, Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase, Receptor Type K ("PTPRTK"), GITR (a/k/a TNFRSF18), Lymphotoxin /3-Receρtor ("LTjSR"), and Epithelial Membrane Protein 2 ("EMP2"). In another aspect, the gene is expressed more in a neoplastic adenocarcinoma lung cell or tumor. The gene is selected from the group consisting of Lectin-like NK. Receptor
("LLNKR"), 4Span4 (a/k/a "MS4A8B"), Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase Receptor Type C (a k/a "CD45"), Tumor Necrosis Factor Receptor Superfamily Member 14 ("TNFRSF14", a/k/a "LIGHTR"), Toll-Like Receptor 2 ("TLR-2") and DKF2P56400823 ("DKFZ"). In a yet further aspect, these genes were not heretofor known to be associated with lung cancer cells and therefore provides a diagnostic and prognostic marker as well as a therapeutic target. Detection can be by any appropriate method, including for example, detecting the quantity of mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of cDNA produced from the reverse transcription of the mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of the polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene. These methods can be performed on a sample by sample basis or modified for high throughput analysis. Additionally, databases containing quantitative full or partial transcripts or protein sequences isolated from a cell sample can be searched and analyzed for the presence and amount of transcript or expressed gene product. The methods are particularly useful for aiding in the diagnosis of squamous tumors or adenocarcinomas of the lung. Another aspect of the invention is a screen to identify therapeutic agents that induce cytolysis, apoptosis or cell death or to treat lung neoplasia and tumors, wherein the lung cell and/or tumor is characterized by the differential expression of at least one gene identified in Table 1, below. The method comprises contacting the cell previously identified as possessing this genotype with an effective amount of a potential agent and assaying for cytolysis or elimination of the cell. Table 1A Over-Expressed in Squamous Tumors Lung Cancer Targets
Figure imgf000005_0001
TABLE IB Over-Expressed in Lung Adenocarcinomas Lung Cancer Targets
Figure imgf000006_0001
*web address is = ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/LocusLink/list.cgi. Further provided by this invention is a method for monitoring lung cancer in a subject by assaying, at different times, the expression level of at least one gene identified in Table 1 and comparing the expression levels of the gene (transcript or expression product) to determine if expression has increased or decreased, thereby monitoring lung cancer in the subject. A kit for use in a diagnostic method or drug screen is further provided herein. The kit comprises at least one agent (e.g., probe, primer or antibody) that detects expression of at least one gene identified in Table 1 and instructions for use. Further provided are polynucleotides encoding the proteins, fragments thereof, or polypeptides, (also referred to herein as gene expression product), gene delivery vehicles comprising these polynucleotides and host cells comprising these polynucleotides. The proteins, polypeptides or fragments thereof are also useful to generate antibodies that specifically recognize and bind to these molecules. The antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal. These antibodies can be used to isolate protein or polypeptides expressed from the genes identified in Table 1. These antibodies are further useful for passive immunotherapy when administered to a subject. The invention also provides isolated host cells and recombinant host cells that contain a gene of Table 1 or its expression product and/or fragments thereof. The cells can be prokaryotic or eukaryotic and by way of example only, can be any one or more of bacterial, yeast, animal, mammalian, human, and particular subtypes thereof, e.g., stem cells, antigen presenting cells (APCs) such as dendritic cells (DCs) or T cells. In addition, the invention provides methods for active immunotherapy, such as, inducing an immune response in a subject by delivering the proteins, polypeptides and fragments thereof, as described herein, to the subject, hi one aspect, the proteins and/or polypeptides/peptides thereof can be delivered in the context of an MHC molecule. The invention also provides immune effector cells raised in vivo or in vitro in the presence and at the expense of an antigen presenting cell that presents a polypeptide fragment expressed from a gene identified in Table 1, supra, in the context of an MHC molecule. The invention also provides a method of adoptive immunotherapy comprising administering an effective amount of these immune effector cells to a subject. Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of inducing cytolysis or elimination of a lung cell, wherein the cell is characterized by differential expression of a gene identified in Table 1, by contacting the cell with a therapeutic agent. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCE LISTINGS SEQ ID NO: 1 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a Porimin polypeptide. SEQ ID NO:2 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a Porimin gene. SEQ ID NO:3 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a PTPRTK polypeptide. SEQ LO NO:4 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from an PTPRTK gene. SEQ ID NO:5 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a GITR polypeptide. SEQ ID NO:6 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a GITR gene. SEQ ID NO:7 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a LT/3R polypeptide. SEQ ID NO: 8 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a LT/3R gene. SEQ ID NO:9 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a EMP2 polypeptide. SEQ ID NO: 10 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a EMP2 gene. SEQ ID NO:l 1 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a LLT1 polypeptide. SEQ ID NO: 12 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a LLT1 gene. SEQ ID NO: 13 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a 4Span4 polypeptide. SEQ ID NO: 14 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a 4Span4 gene. SEQ LO NO: 15 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a CD45 polypeptide. SEQ ID NO: 16 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a CD45 gene. SEQ ID NO: 17 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a LIGHTR polypeptide. SEQ ID NO: 18 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a LIGHTR gene. SEQ ID NO: 19 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a Toll-Like Receptor 2 polypeptide. SEQ ID NO:20 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a Toll-Like Receptor 2 gene. SEQ ID NO:21 is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a DKFZ polypeptide. SEQ LO NO:22 is a polypeptide sequence encoded from a DKFZ gene. MODES FORCARRYINGOUTTHE INVENTION Throughout this disclosure, various publications, patents and published patent specifications are referenced by an identifying citation. The disclosures of these publications, patents and published patent specifications are hereby incorporated by reference into the present disclosure to more fully describe the state of the art to which this invention pertains.
Definitions The practice of the present invention will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of immunology, molecular biology, microbiology, cell biology and recombinant DNA, which are within the skill of the art. See, e.g., Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis, MOLECULAR CLONING: A LABORATORY MANUAL, 2nd edition (1989); CURRENT PROTOCOLS LN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY (F. M. Ausubel, et al. eds., (1987)); the series METHODS IN ENZYMOLOGY (Academic Press, Inc.): PCR 2: A PRACTICAL APPROACH (M.J. MacPherson, B.D. Hames and G.R. Taylor eds. (1995)), Harlow and Lane, eds. (1988) ANTIBODIES, A LABORATORY MANUAL, and ANIMAL CELL CULTURE (R.I. Freshney, ed. (1987)). As used herein, certain terms have the following defined meanings. As used in the specification and claims, the singular form "a", "an" and "the" include plural references unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. For example, the term "a cell" includes a plurality of cells, including mixtures thereof. The terms "polynucleotide" and "oligonucleotide" are used interchangeably, and refer to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof. Polynucleotides can have any three-dimensional structure, and may perform any function, known or unknown. The following are non-hmiting examples of polynucleotides: a gene or gene fragment (for example, a probe, primer, EST or SAGE tag), exons, nitrons, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers. A polynucleotide can comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs. If present, modifications to the nucleotide structure can be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer. The sequence of nucleotides can be interrupted by non-nucleotide components. A polynucleotide can be further modified after polymerization, such as by conjugation with a labeling component. The term also refers to both double- and single-stranded molecules. Unless otherwise specified or required, any embodiment of this invention that is a polynucleotide encompasses both the double-stranded form and each of two complementary single-stranded forms known or predicted to make up the double-stranded form. A polynucleotide is composed of a specific sequence of nucleotide bases: adenine (A); cytosine (C); guanine (G) and thymine (T). Thus, the term
"polynucleotide sequence" is the alphabetical representation of a polynucleotide molecule. This alphabetical representation can be input into databases in a computer having a central processing unit and used for bioinformatics applications such as functional genomics and homology searching. A "gene" refers to a polynucleotide containing at least one open reading frame
(ORF) that is capable of encoding a particular polypeptide or protein after being transcribed and translated. Any of the polynucleotides sequences described herein may be used to identify larger fragments or full-length coding sequences of the gene with which they are associated. Methods of isolating larger fragment sequences are known to those of skill in the art. A "gene product" or alternatively a "gene expression product" refers to the amino acid (e.g., peptide or polypeptide) generated when a gene is transcribed and translated. The term "polypeptide" is used interchangeably with the term "protein" and in its broadest sense refers to a compound of two or more subunit amino acids, amino acid analogs, or peptidomimetics. The subunits may be linked by peptide bonds, hi another embodiment, the subunit may be linked by other bonds, e.g., ester, ether, etc. As used herein the term "amino acid" refers to either natural and/or unnatural or synthetic amino acids, including glycine and both the D or L optical isomers, and amino acid analogs and peptidomimetics. A peptide of three or more amino acids is commonly called an oligopeptide if the peptide chain is short. If the peptide chain is long, the peptide is commonly called a polypeptide or a protein. "Under transcriptional control" is a term well understood in the art and indicates that transcription of a polynucleotide sequence, usually a DNA sequence, depends on its being operatively linked to an element which contributes to the initiation of, or promotes, transcription. "Operatively linked" refers to a juxtaposition wherein the elements are in an arrangement allowing them to function. As used herein, the term "Porimin gene" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence and that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. Zhang, et al. (2001) PNAS 98(17):9778- 9783 isolated porimin cDNA from a Jurkat cell cDNA library by COS cell-expression cloning. The 3,337-bρ cDNA has an ORF of 567 bp, encoding a type I transmembrane protein of 189 amino acids. The extracellular domain was shown to contain many O-linked and seven N-linked glycosylation sites that define it as a new member of the mucin family. The authors report that when expressed in Jurkat cells, a His-tagged porimin cDNA construct resulted in the generation of a specific 110- kDa-size protein that matched the molecular mass of the endogenous porimin protein. Crosslinking of the porimin receptor expressed on COS7 transfectants resulted in the loss of cell membrane integrity and cell death as measured by the leakage of intracellular lactate dehydrogenase. The porimin gene was mapped to human chromosome llq22.1 and is composed of four exons spanning 133 kb of genomic DNA. Sequence ID NO.: 1 is one example of a porimin gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences identified in Table 1 and the sequences that encode porimin gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:2 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 1, and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.172089. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to those identified under Genbank Accession numbers BF797608.1; BG506543.1; and BF105935.1, for example. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "porimin gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ LO NO.: 2 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the porimin genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.:2 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO. : 2 or other porimin gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase Receptor Type K ("PTPRTK")" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence and that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as set forth herein. The protein encoded by this gene is a member of the protein tyrosine phosphatase
(PTP) family. PTPs are reported by LocusLink www.ncbi.nlm.mli.gov/LocusLink to , be signaling molecules that regulate a variety of cellular processes including cell growth, differentiation, mitotic cycle, and oncogenic transformation. This PTP possesses an extracellular region, a single transmembrane region, and two tandem catalytic domains, and thus represents a receptor-type PTP. The extracellular region is reported to contain a meprin-A5 antigen-PTP mu (MAM) domain, an Ig-like domain and four fibronectin type Ill-like repeats was reported to mediate homophilic intercellular interaction, possibly through the interaction with beta- and ga ma- catenin at adherens junctions. Expression of this gene was found to be stimulated by TGF-beta 1, which may be important for the inhibition of keratinocyte proliferation. Sequence ID NO.: 3 is one example of an PTPRTK gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth in Table 1, and the sequences that encode PTPRTK gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:4 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 3, and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.5796. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession Nos.: BM925031.1; BI755683.1; and BG680354.1, for example. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "PTPRTK gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 4 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the PTPRTK genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.:4 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO. : 4 or other PTPRTK gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "GITR gene" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence and that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as set forth herein. LocusLink, supra, reports that the protein encoded by this gene is a member of the TNF-receptor superfamily. This receptor has been reported to have increased expression upon T-cell activation, and it is thought to play a key role in dominant immunological self-tolerance maintained by CD25(+)CD4(+) regulatory T cells. Knockout studies in mice also suggest the role of this receptor is in the regulation of CD3-driven T-cell activation and programmed cell death. Three alternatively spliced transcript variants of this gene encoding distinct isoforms have been reported. Sequence ID NO.: 5 is one example of a GITR gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth in Table 1, and the sequences that encode GITR gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 6 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 5, and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.212680. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession numbers: BI911657.1; AI499936.1; AI214481.1; and AI923712.1. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "GITR gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 6 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the GITR genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.:6 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides have the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 6 or other GITR gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "Lymphotoxin β Receptor ("LT/3R") gene" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. The protein encoded by this gene is described by LocusLink, supra, to be a member of the tumor necrosis factor (TNF) family of receptors. It is expressed on the surface of most cell types, including cells of epithelial and myeloid lineages, but not on T and B lymphocytes. The protein specifically binds the lymphotoxin membrane form (a complex of lymphotoxin- alpha and lympho toxin-beta). The encoded protein and its ligand play a role in the development and organization of lymphoid tissue and transformed cells. Activation of the encoded protein is reported to trigger apoptosis. Sequence ID NO.: 7 is one example of a LTBR gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession Nos. shown in Table 1 and the sequences that encode LT/3R gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:8 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95%o sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ LD NO.: 7 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.4055. Polynucleotide fragment can be generated using known recombinant techniques. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "LT/3R gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 8 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the LT/3R genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 8 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 8 or other LT/3R gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "EMP2 gene" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. The proteins of this family are about 160 to 173 amino acid residues in size, and contain four transmembrane segments. This family also includes the claudins, which are components of tight junctions N and C terminal ends are on the cytoplasmic side. Sequence ID NO.: 9 is one example of an EMP2 gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession Nos. shown in Table 1 and the sequences that encode EMP2 gene expression products as described herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO.T0 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 9 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.2013. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession Nos.: BQ678787.1; BQ425935.1; and BF673715.1. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "EMP2" gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 10 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the EMP2 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 10 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 10 or other EMP2 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "Lectin Like NK Receptor ("LLNR")" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described. The human lectin-like NK cell receptor is reported by Boles, K.S., et al. (Boles, K.S. et al. (1999) nmunogenetics 50(1-2): 1-7) to be a new member of the NK cell receptors located in the human NK gene complex. The protein structure is reported to contain a transmembrane domain near the N-terminus and an extracellular domain with similarity to the C-type lectin-like domains shared with other NK cell receptors. Sequence ID NO.: 11 is one example of an LLNR gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under GenBank Accession numbers identified in Table 1 and the sequences that encode LLNR gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 12 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 11 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art see, e.g. UniGene Cluster Hs.356250. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession numbers: BF103655.1; BQ276634.1; and BM919567.1. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "LLNR" gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 12 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the LLNR genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 12 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO. : 12 or other LLNR gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "4Span4 gene" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. This gene is reported by LocusLink, supra, to be a member of the membrane-spanning 4A gene family. Members of this protein family are characterized by common structural features and similar intron/exon splice boundaries and display unique expression patterns among hematopoietic cells and nonlymphoid tissues. The gene encoding this protein is localized to 1 lql2.3, among a cluster of family members. Sequence ID NO.: 13 is one example of an 4Span4 gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode 4Span4 gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 14 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ LO NO.: 13 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.150184. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession numbers: BI820508.1; BI771406.1; and BI766299.1, for example. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "4Span4 gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 14 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the 4Span4 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95 % homologous to SEQ LO NO.: 14 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 14 or other 4Sρan4 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "CD45" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. The protein encoded is reported by LocusLink, supra, by this gene is a member of the protein tyrosine phosphatase (PTP) family. PTPs are known to be signaling molecules that regulate a variety of cellular processes including cell growth, differentiation, mitotic cycle, and oncogenic transformation. This PTP contains an extracellular domain, a single transmembrane segment and two tandem intracytoplasmic catalytic domains, and thus belongs to receptor type PTP. This gene is specifically expressed in hematopoietic cells. This PTP has been shown to be an essential regulator of T- and B-cell antigen receptor signaling. It functions through either direct interaction with components of the antigen receptor complexes, or by activating various Src family kinases required for the antigen receptor signaling. This PTP also suppresses JAK kinases, and thus functions as a regulator of cytokine receptor signaling. Four alternatively spliced transcripts variants of this gene, which encode distinct isoforms, have been reported. Sequence ID NO.: 15 is one example of an CD45 gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode CD45 gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ LD NO: 16 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 15 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster
Hs.444324. Polynucleotide fragments are also known in the art, and include but are not limited to GenBank Accession numbers: BG756746.1; BG542146.1; BG398445.1 ; and AW502785.1. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "CD45 gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ LD NO.: 15 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the CD45 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 16 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides have the amino acid sequence of SEQ LD NO. : 15 or other CD45 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "TNFRSF14" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. LocusLink, supra, reports that the protein encoded by this gene is a member of the TNF-receptor superfamily. This receptor was identified as a cellular mediator of herpes simplex virus (HSV) entry. Binding of HSN viral envelope glycoprotein D (gD) to this receptor protein has been shown to be part of the viral entry mechanism. The cytoplasmic region of this receptor was found to bind to several TRAF family members, which may mediate the signal transduction pathways that activate the immune response. Sequence ID NO.: 17 is one example of an TNFRSF14 gene, and others are known in the art examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode TNFRSF14 gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 18 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 17 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.279899. Polynucleotide fragments can be generated using methods known in the art. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "TNFRSF14 gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 18 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the TNFRSF14 genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ LD NO.: 18 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 18 or other TNFRSF14 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "TLR-2 gene" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. LocusLink, supra, reports that the protein encoded by this gene is a member of the Toll-like receptor (TLR) family which plays a fundamental role in pathogen recognition and activation of innate immunity. TLRs are highly conserved from Drosophila to humans and share structural and functional similarities. They recognize pathogen-associated molecular patterns (PAMPs) that are expressed on infectious agents, and mediate the production of cytokines necessary for the development of effective immunity. The various TLRs exhibit different patterns of expression. This gene is expressed most abundantly in peripheral blood leukocytes, and mediates host response to Gram-positive bacteria and yeast via stimulation of NF kappaB. Sequence LD NO.: 19 is one example of an TLR-2 gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under the GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode TLR-2 gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 20 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95%o sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 19 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.439608. Polynucleotide fragments can be generated using methods known in the art. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "TLR-2 expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 20 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the TLR genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90 % or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 20 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 20 or other TLR-2 gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "DKFZ" refers to at least the ORF of a contiguous polynucleotide sequence that encodes a protein or polypeptide having the biological activity as described herein. It encodes a protein with high similarity to rat castration induced prostatic apoptosis related protein-1. Sequence ID NO.: 21 is one example of an DKFZ gene, and others are known in the art, examples of which include, but are not limited to the sequences set forth under GenBank Accession numbers shown in Table 1, and the sequences that encode DKFZ gene expression products as defined herein. Also included within this definition are biologically equivalent sequences such as those sequences that code for the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 22 and those having at least 90% or alternatively, at least 95% sequence homology to an exemplary sequence, such as SEQ ID NO.: 21 and as determined by percent identity sequence analysis run under default parameters. Also within this definition are biologically equivalent genes or polynucleotides that are identified by the ability to hybridize under conditions of high stringency to the minus strand. It may be desirable to use non-human genes, the polynucleotide sequences of which are known in the art. See for example, UniGene Cluster Hs.105460. Polynucleotide fragments can be generated using methods known in the art. These are particularly useful as probes or primers. As used herein, the term "DKFZ gene expression product, protein or polypeptide" includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO.: 22 as well as the amino acid sequences transcribed and translated from the DKFZ genes identified above, without regard to the gene expression system, e.g., bacterial or other prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, mammalian cell such as a simian, bovine or human cell. The term includes isolated, naturally occurring polypeptides isolated from tissue samples as well as recombinantly produced proteins and polypeptides. The term also includes polypeptides having the amino acid sequences that are at least 90% or alternatively at least 95% homologous to SEQ ID NO.: 22 and which have the biological activity as described herein. Examples of homologous amino acid sequences include, but are not limited to polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of SEQ LD NO.: 22 or other DKFZ gene expression product that has been modified by conservative amino acid substitutions. As used herein, the term "comprising" is intended to mean that the compositions and methods include the recited elements, but not excluding others. "Consisting essentially of when used to define compositions and methods, shall mean excluding other elements of any essential significance to the combination. Thus, a composition consisting essentially of the elements as defined herein would not exclude trace contaminants from the isolation and purification method and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as phosphate buffered saline, preservatives, and the like. "Consisting of shall mean excluding more than trace elements of other ingredients and substantial method steps for administering the compositions of this invention. Embodiments defined by each of these transition terms are within the scope of this invention. The term "isolated" means separated from constituents, cellular and otherwise, in which the polynucleotide, peptide, polypeptide, protein, antibody, or fragments thereof, are normally associated with in nature. In one aspect of this invention, an isolated polynucleotide is separated from the 3' and 5' contiguous nucleotides with which it is normally associated with in its native or natural environment, e.g., on the chromosome. As is apparent to those of skill in the art, a non-naturally occurring polynucleotide, peptide, polypeptide, protein, antibody, or fragments thereof, does not require "isolation" to distinguish it from its naturally occurring counterpart. In addition, a "concentrated", "separated" or "diluted" polynucleotide, peptide, polypeptide, protein, antibody, or fragments thereof, is distinguishable from its naturally occurring counterpart in that the concentration or number of molecules per volume is greater than "concentrated" or less than "separated" than that of its naturally occurring counterpart. A polynucleotide, peptide, polypeptide, protein, antibody, or fragments thereof, which differs from the naturally occurring counterpart in its primary sequence or for example, by its glycosylation pattern, need not be present in its isolated form since it is distinguishable from its naturally occurring counterpart by its primary sequence, or alternatively, by another characteristic such as glycosylation pattern. Thus, a non-naturally occurring polynucleotide is provided as a separate embodiment from the isolated naturally occurring polynucleotide. A protein produced in a bacterial cell is provided as a separate embodiment from the naturally occurring protein isolated from a eukaryotic cell in which it is produced in nature. "Gene delivery," "gene transfer," and the like as used herein, are terms referring to the introduction of an exogenous polynucleotide (sometimes referred to as a "transgene") into a host cell, irrespective of the method used for the introduction. Such methods include a variety of well-known techniques such as vector-mediated gene transfer (by, e.g., viral infection/transfection, or various other protein-based or lipid-based gene delivery complexes) as well as techniques facilitating the delivery of "naked" polynucleotides (such as electroporation, "gene gun" delivery and various other techniques used for the introduction of polynucleotides). The introduced polynucleotide may be stably or transiently maintained in the host cell. Stable maintenance typically requires that the introduced polynucleotide either contains an origin of replication compatible with the host cell or integrates into a replicon of the host cell such as an extraclrromosomal replicon (e.g., a plasmid) or a nuclear or mitochondrial chromosome. A number of vectors are known in the art to be capable of mediating transfer of genes to mammalian cells. A "gene delivery vehicle" is defined as any molecule that can carry inserted polynucleotides into a host cell. Examples of gene delivery vehicles are liposomes, biocompatible polymers, including natural polymers and synthetic polymers; lipoproteins; polypeptides; polysaccharides; lipopolysaccharides; artificial viral envelopes; recombinant yeast cells, metal particles; and bacteria, or viruses, such as baculovirus, adenovirus and retrovirus, bacteriophage, cos id, plasmid, fungal vectors and other recombination vehicles typically used in the art which have been described for expression in a variety of eukaryotic and prokaryotic hosts, and may be used for gene therapy as well as for simple protein expression. A "viral vector" is defined as a recombinantly produced virus or viral particle that comprises a polynucleotide to be delivered into a host cell, either in vivo, ex vivo or in vitro. Examples of viral vectors include retroviral vectors, adenovirus vectors, adeno-associated virus vectors, alphavirus vectors and the like. Alphavirus vectors, such as Semliki Forest virus-based vectors and Sindbis virus-based vectors, have also been developed for use in gene therapy and immunotherapy. See, Schlesinger and Dubensky (1999) Curr. Opin. Biotechnol. 5:434-439 and Ying et al. (1999) Nat. Med. 5(7):823-827. In aspects where gene transfer is mediated by a retroviral vector, a vector construct refers to the polynucleotide comprising the retroviral genome or part thereof, and a therapeutic gene. As used herein, "retroviral mediated gene transfer" or "retroviral transduction" carries the same meaning and refers to the process by which a gene or nucleic acid sequences are stably transferred into the host cell by virtue of the virus entering the cell and integrating its genome into the host cell genome. The virus can enter the host cell via its normal mechanism of infection or be modified such that it binds to a different host cell surface receptor or ligand to enter the cell. As used herein, retroviral vector refers to a viral particle capable of introducing exogenous nucleic acid into a cell through a viral or viral-like entry mechanism. Retro viruses carry their genetic information in the form of RNA; however, once the virus infects a cell, the RNA is reverse-transcribed into the DNA form which integrates into the genomic DNA of the infected cell. The integrated DNA form is called a provirus. In aspects where gene transfer is mediated by a DNA viral vector, such as an adenovirus (Ad) or adeno-associated virus (AAV), a vector construct refers to the polynucleotide comprising the viral genome or part thereof, and a transgene. Adenoviruses (Ads) are a relatively well characterized, homogenous group of viruses, including over 50 serotypes. See, e.g., WO 95121 Oil. Ads are easy to grow and do not require integration into the host cell genome. Recombinant Ad derived vectors, particularly those that reduce the potential for recombination and generation of wild- type virus, have also been constructed. See, WO 95/00655 and WO 95/11984. Wild- type AAV has high infectivity and specificity integrating into the host cell's genome. See, Hermonat and Muzyczka (1984) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:6466-6470 and Lebkowski et al. (1988) Mol. Cell. Biol. 8:3988-3996. Vectors that contain both a promoter and a cloning site into which a polynucleotide can be operatively linked are well known in the art. Such vectors are capable of transcribing RNA in vitro or in vivo, and are commercially available from sources such as Stratagene (La Jolla, CA) and Promega Biotech (Madison, WT). In order to optimize expression and/or in vitro transcription, it maybe necessary to remove, add or alter 5' and/or 3' untranslated portions of the clones to eliminate extra, potential inappropriate alternative translation initiation codons or other sequences that may interfere with or reduce expression, either at the level of transcription or translation. Alternatively, consensus ribosome binding sites can be inserted immediately 5' of the start codon to enhance expression. Gene delivery vehicles also include several non-viral vectors, including DNA/liposome complexes, recombinant yeast cells, and targeted viral protein-DNA complexes. Liposomes that also comprise a targeting antibody or fragment thereof can be used in the methods of this invention. To enhance delivery to a cell, the nucleic acid or proteins of this invention can be conjugated to antibodies or binding fragments thereof which bind cell surface antigens, e.g., TCR, CD3 or CD4. A "probe" when used in the context of polynucleotide manipulation refers to an oligonucleotide that is provided as a reagent to detect a target potentially present in a sample of interest by hybridizing with the target. Usually, a probe will comprise a label or a means by which a label can be attached, either before or subsequent to the hybridization reaction. Suitable labels include, but are not limited to radioisotopes, fluorochromes, chemiluminescent compounds, dyes, and proteins, including enzymes. A "primer" is a short polynucleotide, generally with a free 3' -OH group that binds to a target or "template" potentially present in a sample of interest by hybridizing with the target, and thereafter promoting polymerization of a polynucleotide complementary to the target. A "polymerase chain reaction" ("PCR") is a reaction in which replicate copies are made of a target polynucleotide using a "pair of primers" or a "set of primers" consisting of an "upstream" and a "downstream" primer, and a catalyst of polymerization, such as a DNA polymerase, and typically a thermally-stable polymerase enzyme. Methods for PCR are well known in the art, and taught, for example in "PCR: A PRACTICAL APPROACH" (M. MacPherson et al., TR Press at Oxford University Press (1991)). All processes of producing replicate copies of a polynucleotide, such as PCR or gene cloning, are collectively referred to herein as "replication." A primer can also be used as a probe in hybridization reactions, such as Southern or Northern blot analyses. Sambrook et al., supra. An expression "database" denotes a set of stored data that represent a collection of sequences, which in turn represent a collection of biological reference materials. The term "cDNAs" refers to complementary DNA that is mRNA molecules present in a cell or organism made into cDNA with an enzyme such as reverse transcriptase. A "cDNA library" is a collection of all of the mRNA molecules present in a cell or organism, all turned into cDNA molecules with the enzyme reverse transcriptase, then inserted into "vectors" (other DNA molecules that can continue to replicate after addition of foreign DNA). Exemplary vectors for libraries include bacteriophage (also known as "phage"), viruses that infect bacteria, for example, lambda phage. The library can then be probed for the specific cDNA (and thus mRNA) of interest. As used herein, "expression" refers to the process by which polynucleotides are transcribed into mRNA and/or the process by which the transcribed mRNA is subsequently being translated into peptides, polypeptides, or proteins. If the polynucleotide is derived from genomic DNA, expression may include splicing of the mRNA in a eukaryotic cell. "Differentially expressed" as applied to a gene, refers to the differential production of the mRNA transcribed and/or translated from the gene or the protein product encoded by the gene. A differentially expressed gene may be overexpressed or underexpressed as compared to the expression level of a normal or control cell. In one aspect, it refers to a differential that is 2.5 times, preferably 5 times, or preferably 10 times higher or lower than the expression level detected in a control sample. The term "differentially expressed" also refers to nucleotide sequences in a cell or tissue which are expressed where silent in a control cell or not expressed where expressed in a control cell. As used herein, "solid phase support" or "solid support", used interchangeably, is not limited to a specific type of support. Rather a large number of supports are available and are known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Solid phase supports include silica gels, resins, derivatized plastic films, glass beads, cotton, plastic beads, alumina gels, microarrays and chips. As used herein, "solid support" also includes synthetic antigen-presenting matrices, cells, and liposomes. A suitable solid phase support may be selected on the basis of desired end use and suitability for various protocols. For example, for peptide synthesis, solid phase support may refer to resins such as polystyrene (e.g., PAM-resin obtained from Bachem Inc., Peninsula Laboratories, etc.), POLYHIPE® resin (obtained from Aminotech, Canada), polyamide resin (obtained from Peninsula Laboratories), polystyrene resin grafted with polyethylene glycol (TentaGel®, Rapp Polymere, Tubingen, Germany) or polydimethylacrylamide resin (obtained from Milligen Biosearch, California). A polynucleotide also can be attached to a solid support for use in high throughput screening assays. PCT WO 97/10365, for example, discloses the construction of high density oligonucleotide chips. See also, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,405,783; 5,412,087; and 5,445,934. Using this method, the probes are synthesized on a derivatized glass surface also known as chip arrays. Photoprotected nucleoside phosphoramidites are coupled to the glass surface, selectively deprotected by photolysis through a photolithographic mask, and reacted with a second protected nucleoside phosphoramidite. The coupling/deprotection process is repeated until the desired probe is complete. "Hybridization" refers to a reaction in which one or more polynucleotides react to form a complex that is stabilized via hydrogen bonding between the bases of the nucleotide residues. The hydrogen bonding may occur by Watson-Crick base pairing, Hoogstein binding, or in any other sequence-specific manner. The complex may comprise two strands forming a duplex structure, three or more strands forming a multi-stranded complex, a single self-hybridizing strand, or any combination of these. A hybridization reaction may constitute a step in a more extensive process, such as the initiation of a PCR reaction, or the enzymatic cleavage of a polynucleotide by a ribozyme. Hybridization reactions can be performed under conditions of different "stringency". In general, a low stringency hybridization reaction is carried out at about 40 °C in 10 x SSC or a solution of equivalent ionic strength temperature. A moderate stringency hybridization is typically performed at about 50 °C in 6 x SSC, and a high stringency hybridization reaction is generally performed at about 60 °C in 1 x SSC. When hybridization occurs in an antiparallel configuration between two single-stranded polynucleotides, the reaction is called "annealing" and those polynucleotides are described as "complementary". A double-stranded polynucleotide can be "complementary" or "homologous" to another polynucleotide, if hybridization can occur between one of the strands of the first polynucleotide and the second. "Complementarity" or "homology" (the degree that one polynucleotide is complementary with another) is quantifiable in terms of the proportion of bases in opposing strands that are expected to form hydrogen bonding with each other, according to generally accepted base-pairing rules. A polynucleotide or polynucleotide region (or a polypeptide or polypeptide region) has a certain percentage (for example, 80%o, 85%, 90%, or 95%) of "sequence identity" to another sequence means that, when aligned, that percentage of bases (or amino acids) are the same in comparing the two sequences. This alignment and the percent homology or sequence identity can be determined using software programs known in the art, for example those described in CURRENT PROTOCOLS JN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY (F.M. Ausubel et al., eds., 1987) Supplement 30, section 7.7.18, Table 7.7.1. Preferably, default parameters are used for alignment. A preferred alignment program is BLAST, using default parameters, hi particular, preferred programs are BLASTN and BLASTP, using the following default parameters: Genetic code = standard; filter = none; strand = both; cutoff = 60; expect = 10; Matrix = BLOSUM62; Descriptions = 50 sequences; sort by = HIGH SCORE; Databases = non-redundant, GenBank + EMBL + DDBJ + PDB + GenBank CDS translations + SwissProtein + SPupdate + PLR. Details of these programs can be found at the following Internet address: http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/cgi-bin/BLAST. Hyperplasia is a form of controlled cell proliferation involving an increase in cell number in a tissue or organ, without significant alteration in structure or function. Metaplasia is a form of controlled cell growth in which one type of fully differentiated cell substitutes for another type of differentiated cell. Metaplasia can occur in epithelial or connective tissue cells. Atypical metaplasia involves a somewhat disorderly metaplastic epithelium. As used herein, the terms "neoplastic cells", "neoplasia", "tumor", "tumor cells", "cancer" and "cancer cells", (used interchangeably) refer to cells which exhibit relatively autonomous growth, so that they exhibit an aberrant growth phenotype characterized by a significant loss of control of cell proliferation (i.e., de-regulated cell division). Neoplastic cells can be malignant or benign. A metastatic cell or tissue means that the cell can invade and destroy neighboring body structures. "Suppressing" tumor growth indicates a growth state that is curtailed when compared to growth without contact with educated, antigen-specific immune effector cells described herein. Tumor cell growth can be assessed by any means known in the art, including, but not limited to, measuring tumor size, determining whether tumor cells are proliferating using a H-thymidine incorporation assay, or counting tumor cells. "Suppressing" tumor cell growth means any or all of the following states: slowing, delaying, and stopping tumor growth, as well as tumor shrinkage. All numerical designations, e.g., pH, temperature, time, concentration, and molecular weight, including ranges, are approximations which are varied ( + ) or ( - ) by increments of 0.1. It is to be understood, although not always explicitly stated that all numerical designations are preceded by the term "about". It also is to be understood, although not always explicitly stated, that the reagents described herein are merely exemplary and that equivalents of such are known in the art. The term "antigen" is well understood in the art and includes substances which are immunogenic. The term as used herein also includes substances which induce immunological unresponsiveness or anergy. A "native" or "natural" or "wild-type" antigen is a polypeptide, protein or a fragment which contains an epitope and which has been isolated from a natural biological source. It also can specifically bind to an antigen receptor. As used herein, an "antibody" includes whole antibodies and any antigen binding fragment or a single chain thereof. Thus the term "antibody" includes any protein or peptide containing molecule that comprises at least a portion of an immunoglobulin molecule. Examples of such include, but are not limited to a complementarity determining region (CDR) of a heavy or light chain or a ligand binding portion thereof, a heavy chain or light chain variable region, a heavy chain or light chain constant region, a framework (FR) region, or any portion thereof, or at least one portion of a binding protein, any of which can be incorporated into an antibody of the present invention. The antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal and can be isolated from any suitable biological source, e.g., murine, rat, sheep and canine. Additional sources are identified infra. The term "antibody" is further intended to encompass digestion fragments, specified portions, derivatives and variants thereof, including antibody mimetics or comprising portions of antibodies that mimic the structure and/or function of an antibody or specified fragment or portion thereof, including single chain antibodies and fragments thereof. Examples of binding fragments encompassed within the term "antigen binding portion" of an antibody include a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment consisting of the NL, NH, CL and CH, domains; a F(ab')2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; a Fd fragment consisting of the NH and CH, domains; a Fv fragment consisting of the NL and NH domains of a single arm of an antibody, a dAb fragment (Ward et al. (1989) Nature 341:544-546), which consists of a NH domain; and an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR). Furthermore, although the two domains of the Fv fragment, NL and NH, are coded for by separate genes, they can be joined, using recombinant methods, by a synthetic linker that enables them to be made as a single protein chain in which the NL and NH regions pair to form monovalent molecules (known as single chain Fv (scFv)). Bird et al. (1988) Science 242:423-426 and Huston et al. (1988) Proc. Νatl. Acad Sci. USA 85:5879-5883. Single chain antibodies are also intended to be encompassed within the term "fragment of an antibody." Any of the above-noted antibody fragments are obtained using conventional techniques known to those of skill in the art, and the fragments are screened for binding specificity and neutralization activity in the same manner as are intact antibodies. The term "epitope" means a protein determinant capable of specific binding to an antibody. Epitopes usually consist of chemically active surface groupings of molecules such as amino acids or sugar side chains and usually have specific three dimensional structural characteristics, as well as specific charge characteristics. Conformational and nonconformational epitopes are distinguished in that the binding to the former but not the latter is lost in the presence of denaturing solvents. The term "antibody" variant is intended to include antibodies produced in a species other than a mouse or an isotype of an antibody of this invention. The term "antibody variant" also includes antibodies containing post-translational modifications to the linear polypeptide sequence of the antibody or fragment. It further encompasses fully human antibodies. The term "antibody derivative" is intended to encompass molecules that bind an epitope as defined above and which are modifications or derivatives of a native monoclonal antibody of this invention. Derivatives include, but are not limited to, for example, bispecifϊc, multispecific, heterospecific, trispecific, tetraspecifϊc, multispecific antibodies, diabodies, chimeric, recombinant and humanized. The term "bispecific molecule" is intended to include any agent, e.g., a protein, peptide, or protein or peptide complex, which has two different binding specificities. The term "multispecific molecule" or "heterospecific molecule" is intended to include any agent, e.g. a protein, peptide, or protein or peptide complex, which has more than two different binding specificities. The term "heteroantibodies" refers to two or more antibodies, antibody binding fragments (e.g., Fab), derivatives thereof, or antigen binding regions linked together, at least two of which have different specificities. The term "human antibody" as used herein, is intended to include antibodies having variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. The human antibodies of the invention may include amino acid residues not encoded by human germline immunoglobulin sequences (e.g., mutations introduced by random or site-specific mutagenesis in vitro or by somatic mutation in vivo). However, the term "human antibody" as used herein, is not intended to include antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences. Thus, as used herein, the term "human antibody" refers to an antibody in which substantially every part of the protein (e.g., CDR, framework, CL, CH domains (e.g., CHI, CH2> Crø), hinge, (NL, VH)) is substantially non-immunogenic in humans, with only minor sequence changes or variations. Similarly, antibodies designated primate (monkey, baboon, chimpanzee, etc.), rodent (mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, hamster, and the like) and other mammals designate such species, sub-genus, genus, sub-family, family specific antibodies. Further, chimeric antibodies include any combination of the above. Such changes or variations optionally and preferably retain or reduce the immunogenicity in humans or other species relative to non-modified antibodies. Thus, a human antibody is distinct from a chimeric or humanized antibody. It is pointed out that a human antibody can be produced by a non-human animal or prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell that is capable of expressing functionally rearranged human immunoglobulin (e.g., heavy chain and/or light chain) genes. Further, when a human antibody is a single chain antibody, it can comprise a linker peptide that is not found in native human antibodies. For example, an Fv can comprise a linker peptide, such as two to about eight glycine or other amino acid residues, which connects the variable region of the heavy chain and the variable region of the light chain. Such linker peptides are considered to be of human origin. As used herein, a human antibody is "derived from" a particular germline sequence if the antibody is obtained from a system using human immunoglobulin sequences, e.g., by immunizing a trans genie mouse carrying human immunoglobulin genes or by screening a human immunoglobulin gene library. A human antibody that is "derived from" a human germline immunoglobulin sequence can be identified as such by comparing the amino acid sequence of the human antibody to the amino acid sequence of human germline immunoglobulins. A selected human antibody typically is at least 90% identical in amino acids sequence to an amino acid sequence encoded by a human germline immunoglobulin gene and contains amino acid residues that identify the human antibody as being human when compared to the germline immunoglobulin amino acid sequences of other species (e.g., murine germline sequences). In certain cases, a human antibody may be at least 95%, or even at least 96%, 91%, 98%o, or 99% identical in amino acid sequence to the amino acid sequence encoded by the germline immunoglobulin gene. Typically, a human antibody derived from a particular human germline sequence will display no more than 10 amino acid differences from the amino acid sequence encoded by the human germline immunoglobulin gene. In certain cases, the human antibody may display no more than 5, or even no more than 4, 3, 2, or 1 amino acid difference from the amino acid sequence encoded by the germline immunoglobulin gene. The terms "monoclonal antibody" or "monoclonal antibody composition" as used herein refer to a preparation of antibody molecules of single molecular composition. A monoclonal antibody composition displays a single binding specificity and affinity for a particular epitope. A "human monoclonal antibody" refers to antibodies displaying a single binding specificity which have variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. The term "recombinant human antibody", as used herein, includes all human antibodies that are prepared, expressed, created or isolated by recombinant means, such as antibodies isolated from an animal (e.g., a mouse) that is transgenic or transchromosomal for human immunoglobulin genes or a hybridoma prepared therefrom, antibodies isolated from a host cell transformed to express the antibody, e.g., from a transfectoma, antibodies isolated from a recombinant, combinatorial human antibody library, and antibodies prepared, expressed, created or isolated by any other means that involve splicing of human immunoglobulin gene sequences to other DNA sequences. Such recombinant human antibodies have variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. In certain embodiments, however, such recombinant human antibodies can be subjected to in vitro mutagenesis (or, when an animal transgenic for human Ig sequences is used, in vivo somatic mutagenesis) and thus the amino acid sequences of the NH and NL regions of the recombinant antibodies are sequences that, while derived from and related to human germline NH and NL sequences, may not naturally exist within the human antibody germline repertoire in vivo. As used herein, "isotype" refers to the antibody class (e.g., IgM or IgGl) that is encoded by heavy chain constant region genes. A "composition" is intended to mean a combination of active agent and another compound or composition, inert (for example, a detectable agent or label) or active, such as an adjuvant. A "pharmaceutical composition" is intended to include the combination of an active agent with a carrier, inert or active, making the composition suitable for diagnostic or therapeutic use in vitro, in vivo or ex vivo. As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" encompasses any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers, such as a phosphate buffered saline solution, water, and emulsions, such as an oil/water or water/oil emulsion, and various types of wetting agents. The compositions also can include stabilizers and preservatives. For examples of carriers, stabilizers and adjuvants, see Martin, REMINGTON'S PHARM. SCI, 15th Ed. (Mack Publ. Co., Easton (1975)). An "effective amount" is an amount sufficient to effect beneficial or desired results such as prevention or treatment. An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations, applications or dosages. A "subject," "individual" or "patient" is used interchangeably herein, which refers to a vertebrate, preferably a mammal, more preferably a human. Mammals include, but are not limited to, rnurines, simians, humans, farm animals, sport animals, and pets. A "control" is an alternative subject or sample used in an experiment for comparison purpose. A control can be "positive" or "negative". For example, where the purpose of the experiment is to determine a correlation of an altered expression level of a gene with a particular type of cancer, it is generally preferable to use a positive control (a subject or a sample from a subject, carrying such alteration and exhibiting syndromes characteristic of that disease), and a negative control (a subject or a sample from a subject lacking the altered expression and clinical syndrome of that disease).
DIAGNOSTIC METHODS As noted above, this invention provides various methods for aiding in the diagnosis of the neoplastic state of a lung cell that is characterized by abnormal cell growth in the form of, e.g., malignancy, hyperplasia or metaplasia. The methods are particularly useful for aiding in the diagnosis of non-small cell lung cancer cell. The neoplastic state of a cell generally is determined by noting whether the growth of the cell is not governed by the usual limitation of normal growth. For the purposes of this invention, the term also is to include genotypic changes that occur prior to detection of this growth in the form of a tumor and are causative of these phenotypic changes. The phenotypic changes associated with the neoplastic state of a cell (a set of in vitro characteristics associated with a tumorigenic ability in vivo) include a more rounded cell morphology, looser substratum attachment, loss of contact inhibition, loss of anchorage dependence, release of proteases such as plasminogen activator, increased sugar transport, decreased serum requirement, expression of fetal antigens and the like. (See, Luria et al. (1978) GENERAL VIROLOGY, 3d edition, 436-446 (John Wiley & Sons, New York)). Accordingly, one embodiment is a method of diagnosing the condition of a lung cell by screening for the presence of a differentially expressed gene isolated from a sample containing or suspected of containing a lung cell, in which the differential expression of the gene is indicative of the neoplastic state of the lung cell. In one aspect, the gene is expressed more in a neoplastic lung cell or a lung tumor cell as compared to normal lung cell, and is selected from those identified in Table 1. Detection can be by any appropriate method, including for example, detecting the quantity of mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of cDNA produced from the reverse transcription of the mRNA transcribed from the gene, or the quantity of the polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene. Probes for each of these methods are provided in Table 1. These methods can be performed on a sample by sample basis or modified for high throughput analysis. Additionally, databases containing quantitative full or partial transcripts or protein sequences isolated from a cell sample can be searched and analyzed for the presence and amount of transcript or expressed gene product. In one aspect, the database contains at least one of the sequences shown in Table 1. For the purpose of illustration only, gene expression is determined by noting the amount (if any, e.g., altered) expression of the gene in the test system at the level of an mRNA transcribed from at least one gene identified in Table 1. In a separate embodiment, augmentation of the level of the polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene is indicative of the presence of the neoplastic condition of the cell. In yet a further embodiment, a decrease in the level of polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene is indicative of the neoplastic condition. The method can be used for aiding in the diagnosis of lung cancer such as non-small cell lung cancer by detecting a genotype that is correlated with a phenotype characteristic of primary lung tumor cells. Thus, by detecting this genotype prior to tumor growth, one can predict a predisposition to cancer and/or provide early diagnosis and treatment. Cell or tissue samples used for this invention encompass body fluid, solid tissue samples, tissue cultures or cells derived there from and the progeny thereof, and sections or smears prepared from any of these sources, or any other samples that may contain a lung cell having a gene described herein. In one embodiment, the sample comprises cells prepared from a subject's lung tissue. In assaying for an alteration in mRNA level, nucleic acid contained in the aforementioned samples is first extracted according to standard methods in the art. For instance, mRNA can be isolated using various lyric enzymes or chemical solutions according to the procedures set forth in Sambrook et al. (1989) supra, or extracted by nucleic-acid-binding resins following the accompanying instructions provided by manufactures. The mRNA of a proto-oncogene of interest contained in the extracted nucleic acid sample is then detected by hybridization (e.g., Northern blot analysis) and/or amplification procedures according to methods widely known in the art or based on the methods exemplified herein. Nucleic acid molecules having at least 10 nucleotides and exhibiting sequence complementarity or homology to at least one gene identified in Table 1 find utility as hybridization probes. It is known in the art that a "perfectly matched" probe is not needed for a specific hybridization. Minor changes in probe sequence achieved by substitution, deletion or insertion of a small number of bases do not affect the hybridization specificity. In general, as much as 20% base-pair mismatch (when optimally aligned) can be tolerated. Preferably, a probe useful for detecting mRNA is at least about 80% identical to the homologous region of comparable size contained in the genes or polynucleotides identified in Table 1 identified sequences, which have the Locus Link numbers identified in Table 1. In one aspect, the probe is 85% identical to the corresponding gene sequence after alignment of the homologous region, or alternatively, it exhibits 90% identity. Additional probes can be derived from sequences for the genes identified by the Locus Link Nos. provided in Table 1, or to a homologous region of comparable size contained in the previously identified sequences, which have the Locus Link Nos. identified in Table 1. These probes can be used in radioassays (e.g., Southern and Northern blot analysis) to detect, prognose, diagnose or monitor various neoplastic states resulting from differential expression of a gene of interest. The total size of fragment, as well as the size of the complementary stretches, will depend on the intended use or application of the particular nucleic acid segment. Smaller fragments derived from the known sequences will generally find use in hybridization embodiments, wherein the length of the complementary region may be varied, such as between about 10 and about 100 nucleotides, or even full length according to the complementary sequences one wishes to detect. Ln one aspect, nucleotide probes having complementary sequences over stretches greater than about 10 nucleotides in length are used, so as to increase stability and selectivity of the hybrid, and thereby improving the specificity of particular hybrid molecules obtained. Alternatively, one can design nucleic acid molecules having gene-complementary stretches of more than about 25 or alternatively more than about 50 nucleotides in length, or even longer where desired. Such fragments may be readily prepared by, for example, directly synthesizing the fragment by chemical means, by application of nucleic acid reproduction technology, such as the PCR™ teclmology with two priming oligonucleotides as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,603,102 or by introducing selected sequences into recombinant vectors for recombinant production, i one aspect, a probe is about 50 to about 75, nucleotides or alternatively, about 50 to about 100 nucleotides in length. Ln certain embodiments, it will be advantageous to employ nucleic acid sequences as described herein in combination with an appropriate means, such as a label, for detecting hybridization and therefore complementary sequences. A wide variety of appropriate indicator means are known in the art, including fluorescent, radioactive, enzymatic or other ligands, such as avidin/biotin, which are capable of giving a detectable signal. One can employ a fluorescent label or an enzyme tag, such as urease, alkaline phosphatase or peroxidase, instead of radioactive or other environmental undesirable reagents, hi the case of enzyme tags, colorimetric t indicator substrates are known which can be employed to provide a means visible to the human eye or spectrophotometrically, to identify specific hybridization with complementary nucleic acid-containing samples. Hybridization reactions can be performed under conditions of different "stringency". Relevant conditions include temperature, ionic strength, time of incubation, the presence of additional solutes in the reaction mixture such as formamide, and the washing procedure. Higher stringency conditions are those conditions, such as higher temperature and lower sodium ion concentration, which require higher minimum complementarity between hybridizing elements for a stable hybridization complex to form. Conditions that increase the stringency of a hybridization reaction are widely known and published in the art. See, for example, Sambrook et al. (1989) supra. The nucleotide probes of the present invention can also be used as primers and detection of genes or gene transcripts that are differentially expressed in certain body tissues. Additionally, a primer useful for detecting the aforementioned differentially expressed mRNA is at least about 80% identical to the homologous region of comparable size contained in the previously identified sequences, which have the Locus Link Nos. numbers identified in Table 1. For the purpose of this invention, amplification means any method employing a primer-dependent polymerase capable of replicating a target sequence with reasonable fidelity. Amplification may be carried out by natural or recombinant DNA-polymerases such as T7 DNA polymerase, Klenow fragment of E.coli DNA polymerase, and reverse transcriptase. A known amplification method is PCR, MacPherson et al., PCR: A PRACTICAL APPROACH, (IRL Press at Oxford University Press (1991)). However, PCR conditions used for each application reaction are empirically determined. A number of parameters influence the success of a reaction. Among them are annealing temperature and time, extension time, Mg2+ ATP concentration, pH, and the relative concentration of primers, templates, and deoxyribonucleotides. After amplification, the resulting DNA fragments can be detected by agarose gel electrophoresis followed by visualization with ethidium bromide staining and ultraviolet illumination. A specific amplification of differentially expressed genes of interest can be verified by demonstrating that the amplified DNA fragment has the predicted size, exhibits the predicted restriction digestion pattern, and/or hybridizes to the correct cloned DNA sequence. The probes also can be attached to a solid support for use in high throughput screening assays using methods known in the art. PCT WO 97/10365 and U.S. Patent Nos.: 5,405,783; 5,412,087 and 5,445,934; for example, disclose the construction of high density oligonucleotide chips which can contain one or more of the sequences disclosed herein. Using the methods disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos.: 5,405,783; 5,412,087 and 5,445,934; the probes of this invention are synthesized on a derivatized glass surface. Photoprotected nucleoside phosphoramidites are coupled to the glass surface, selectively deprotected by photolysis through a photolithographic mask, and reacted with a second protected nucleoside phosphoramidite. The coupling/deprotection process is repeated until the desired probe is complete. The expression level of a gene can also be determined through exposure of a nucleic acid sample to a probe-modified chip. Extracted nucleic acid is labeled, for example, with a fluorescent tag, preferably during an amplification step.
Hybridization of the labeled sample is performed at an appropriate stringency level. The degree of probe-nucleic acid hybridization is quantitatively measured using a detection device, such as a confocal microscope. See U.S. Pat Nos. 5,578,832 and 5,631,734. The obtained measurement is directly correlated with gene expression level. The probes and high density oligonucleotide probe arrays also provide an effective means of monitoring expression of the genes identified in Table 1. They are also useful to screen for compositions that upregulate or downregulate the expression of the genes identified in Table 1. In another embodiment, the methods of this invention are used to monitor expression of the genes identified in Table 1 which specifically hybridize to the probes of this invention in response to defined stimuli, such as an exposure of a cell or subject to a drug. In one embodiment, the hybridized nucleic acids are detected by detecting one or more labels attached to the sample nucleic acids. The labels may be incorporated by any of a number of means known to those of skill in the art. However, in one aspect, the label is simultaneously incorporated during the amplification step in the preparation of the sample nucleic acid. Thus, for example, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) with labeled primers or labeled nucleotides will provide a labeled amplification product. In a separate embodiment, transcription amplification, as described above, using a labeled nucleotide (e.g., fluorescein-labeled UTP and/or CTP) incorporates a label in to the transcribed nucleic acids. Alternatively, a label may be added directly to the original nucleic acid sample (e.g., mRNA, polyA, mRNA, cDNA, etc.) or to the amplification product after the amplification is completed. Means of attaching labels to nucleic acids are known to those of skill in the art and include, for example nick translation or end-labeling (e.g., with a labeled RNA) by kinasing of the nucleic acid and subsequent attachment (ligation) of a nucleic acid linker joining the sample nucleic acid to a label (e.g., a fluorophore). Detectable labels suitable for use in the present invention include any composition detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, electrical, optical or chemical means. Useful labels in the present invention include biotin for staining with labeled streptavidin conjugate, magnetic beads (e.g., Dynabeads™), fluorescent dyes (e.g., fluorescein, Texas red, rhodamine, green fluorescent protein, and the like), radiolabels (e.g., H, I, S, C, or P) enzymes (e.g., horse radish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase and others commonly used in an ELISA), and colorimetric labels such as colloidal gold or colored glass or plastic (e.g., polystyrene, polypropylene, latex, etc.) beads. Patents teaching the use of such labels include U.S. Patents Nos. 3,817,837; 3,850,752; 3,939,350; 3,996,345; 4,277,437; 4,275,149; and 4,366,241. Means of detecting such labels are known to those of skill in the art. Thus, for example, radiolabels may be detected using photographic film or scintillation counters, fluorescent markers may be detected using a photodetector to detect emitted light. Enzymatic labels are typically detected by providing the enzyme with a substrate and detecting the reaction product produced by the action of the enzyme on the substrate, and colorimetric labels are detected by simply visualizing the colored label. As described in more detail in WO 97/10365, the label may be added to the target (sample) nucleic acid(s) prior to, or after the hybridization. These are detectable labels that are directly attached to or incorporated into the target (sample) nucleic acid prior to hybridization, i contrast, "indirect labels" are joined to the hybrid duplex after hybridization. Often, the indirect label is attached to a binding moiety that has been attached to the target nucleic acid prior to the hybridization. Thus, for example, the target nucleic acid may be biotinylated before the hybridization. After hybridization, an avidin-conjugated fluorophore will bind the biotin bearing hybrid duplexes providing a label that is easily detected. For a detailed review of methods of labeling nucleic acids and detecting labeled hybridized nucleic acids see. LABORATORY TECHNIQUES IN BIOCHEMISTRY AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, Vol. 24: Hybridization with Nucleic Acid Probes, P. Tijssen, ed. Elsevier, N.Y. (1993). The nucleic acid sample also may be modified prior to hybridization to the high density probe array in order to reduce sample complexity thereby decreasing background signal and improving sensitivity of the measurement using methods known in the art, e.g., the methods disclosed in WO 97/10365. Results from the chip assay are typically analyzed using a computer software program. See, fox example, EP 0717 113 A2 and WO 95/20681. The hybridization data is read into the program, which calculates the expression level of the targeted gene(s) i.e., the genes identified in Table 1. This figure is compared against existing data sets of gene expression levels for diseased and healthy individuals. A correlation between the obtained data and that of a set of diseased individuals indicates the onset of a disease in the subject patient. Also within the scope of this application is a data base useful for the detection of neoplastic lung tissue comprising one or more of the sequences (or parts thereof) of the genes listed Table 1. These polynucleotide sequences are stored in a digital storage medium such that a data processing system for standardized representation of the genes that identify a lung cancer cell is compiled. The data processing system is useful to analyze gene expression between two cells by first selecting a cell suspected of being of a neoplastic phenotype or genotype and then isolating polynucleotides from the cell. The isolated polynucleotides are then sequenced. The sequences from the sample are compared with the sequence(s) present in the database using homology search techniques described above. In one aspect, greater than 90% is selected, or alternatively greater than 95% is selected, or alternatively greater than or equal to 91% sequence identity is selected, between the test sequence and at least one sequence identified in Table 1 or its complement, is a positive indication that the polynucleotide has been isolated from a lung cancer cell as defined above. Alternatively, one can compare a sample against a database. Briefly, multiple RNAs are isolated from cell or tissue samples using methods known in the art and described for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) supra. Optionally, the gene transcripts can be converted to cDNA. A sampling of the gene transcripts are subjected to sequence-specific analysis and quantified. These gene transcript sequence abundances are compared against reference database sequence abundances including normal data sets for diseased and healthy patients. The patient has the disease(s) with which the patient's data set most closely correlates which includes the overexpression of the transcripts identified herein. Differential expression of the genes of interest can also be determined by examining the protein product. A variety of techniques are available in the art for protein analysis. They include but are not limited to radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunoradiometric assays), "sandwich" immunoassays, immunoradiometric assays, in situ immunoassays (using e.g., colloidal gold, enzyme or radioisotope labels), western blot analysis, immunoprecipitation assays, immunofluorescent assays, and PAGE-SDS. One means to determine protein level involves (a) providing a biological sample containing polypeptides; and (b) measuring the amount of any immunospecific binding that occurs between an antibody reactive to the expression product of a gene of interest and a component in the sample, in which the amount of immunospecific binding indicates the level of the expressed proteins. Antibodies that specifically recognize and bind to the protein products of these genes are required for these immunoassays. These may be purchased from commercial vendors or generated and screened using methods well known in the art. See Harlow and Lane (1988) supra, and Sambrook et al. (1989) supra. Alternatively, polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that specifically recognize and bind the protein product of a gene of interest can be made and isolated using known methods. In diagnosing malignancy, hyperplasia or metaplasia characterized by a differential expression of genes, one typically conducts a comparative analysis of the subject and appropriate controls. Preferably, a diagnostic test includes a control sample derived from a subject (hereinafter "positive control"), that exhibits the predicted change in expression of a gene of interest, e.g., at a level of at least 2.5 fold and clinical characteristics of the malignancy or metaplasia of interest. Alternatively, a diagnosis also includes a control sample derived from a subject (hereinafter
"negative control"), that lacks the clinical characteristics of the neoplastic state and whose expression level of the gene at question is within a normal range. A positive correlation between the subject and the positive control with respect to the identified alterations indicates the presence of or a predisposition to said disease. A lack of correlation between the subject and the negative control confirms the diagnosis, hi a preferred embodiment, the method is used for diagnosing lung cancer, preferably non- small lung cancer, on the basis of a differential expression of a gene of Table 1. There are various methods available in the art for quantifying mRNA or protein level from a cell sample and indeed, any method that can quantify these levels is encompassed by this invention. For example, determination of the mRNA level of the aforementioned genes may involve, in one aspect, measuring the amount of mRNA in a sample isolated from the lung cell by hybridization or quantitative amplification using at least one oligonucleotide probe that is complementary to the mRNA. Determination of the aforementioned gene products requires measuring the amount of immunospecific binding that occurs between an antibody reactive to the gene product of a gene identified in Table 1. To detect and quantify the immunospecific binding, or signals generated during hybridization or amplification procedures, digital image analysis systems including but not limited to those that detect radioactivity of the probes or chemiluminescence can be employed.
SCREENING ASSAYS The present invention also provides a screen for identifying leads, drugs, therapeutic biologies, and methods for reversing the neoplastic condition of the cells or selectively inhibiting growth or proliferation of the cells described above. In one aspect, the screen identifies lead compounds or biological agents which are useful for the treatment of malignancy, hyperplasia or metaplasia characterized by differential expression of a gene identified in Table 1. Thus, to practice the method in vitro, suitable cell cultures or tissue cultures are first provided. The cell can be a cultured cell or a genetically modified cell which differentially expresses a gene associated with a neoplastic lung cell e.g., at least one gene identified in Table 1. Alternatively, the cells can be from a tissue biopsy. The cells are cultured under conditions (temperature, growth or culture medium and gas (CO2)) and for an appropriate amount of time to attain exponential proliferation without density dependent constraints. It also is desirable to maintain an additional separate cell culture; one which does not receive the agent being tested as a control. As is apparent to one of skill in the art, the method can be modified for high throughput analysis and suitable cells may be cultured in microtiter plates and several agents may be assayed at the same time by noting genotypic changes, phenotypic changes and/or cell death. When the agent is a composition other than a DNA or RNA nucleic acid molecule, the suitable conditions comprise directly added to the cell culture or added to culture medium for addition. As is apparent to those skilled in the art, an "effective" amount must be added which can be empirically determined. The screen involves contacting the agent with a test cell characterized by differential expression of a gene of interest and then assaying the cell for the level of said gene expression. In some aspects, it may be necessary to determine the level of gene expression prior to the assay. This provides a base line to compare expression after administration of the agent to the cell culture. In another embodiment, the test cell is a cultured cell from an established cell line that differentially expresses a gene of interest. An agent is a possible therapeutic agent if gene expression is returned (reduced or increased) to a level that is present in a cell in a normal or non-neoplastic state, or the cell selectively dies, or exhibits reduced rate of growth. In yet another aspect, the test cell or tissue sample is isolated from the subject to be treated and one or more potential agents are screened to determine the optimal therapeutic and/or course of treatment for that individual patient. For the purposes of this invention, an "agent" is intended to include, but not be limited to a biological or chemical compound such as a simple or complex organic or inorganic molecule, a peptide, a protein or an oligonucleotide. A vast array of compounds can be synthesized, for example oligomers, such as oligopeptides and oligonucleotides, and synthetic organic compounds based on various core structures, and these are also included in the term "agent". In addition, various natural sources can provide compounds for screening, such as plant or animal extracts, and the like. It should be understood, although not always explicitly stated that the agent is used alone or in combination with another agent, having the same or different biological activity as the agents identified by the inventive screen. The agents and methods also are intended to be combined with other therapies. As used herein, the term "reversing the neoplastic state of the cell" is intended to include apoptosis, necrosis or any other means of preventing cell division, reduced tumorigenicity, loss of pharmaceutical resistance, maturation, differentiation or reversion of the neoplastic phenotypes as described herein. As noted above, lung cells having differential expression of a gene of interest that results in the neoplastic state are suitably treated by this method. These cells can be identified by any method known in the art that allows for the identification of differential expression of the gene. When the agent is a nucleic acid, it can be added to the cell cultures by methods known in the art, which includes, but is not limited to calcium phosphate precipitation, microinjection or electroporation. Alternatively or additionally, the nucleic acid can be incorporated into an expression or insertion vector for incorporation into the cells. Vectors that contain both a promoter and a cloning site into which a polynucleotide can be operatively linked are well known in the art and briefly described infra. Polynucleotides are inserted into vector genomes using methods well known in the art. For example, insert and vector DNA can be contacted, under suitable conditions, with a restriction enzyme to create complementary ends on each molecule that can pair with each other and be joined together with a ligase. Alternatively, synthetic nucleic acid linkers can be ligated to the termini of restricted polynucleotide. These synthetic linkers contain nucleic acid sequences that correspond to a particular restriction site in the vector DNA. Additionally, an oligonucleotide containing a termination codon and an appropriate restriction site can be ligated for insertion into a vector containing, for example, some or all of the following: a selectable marker gene, such as the neomycin gene for selection of stable or transient transfectants in mammalian cells; enhancer/promoter sequences from the immediate early gene of human CMV for high levels of transcription; transcription termination and RNA processing signals from SV40 for mRNA stability; SV40 polyoma origins of replication and ColEl for proper episomal replication; versatile multiple cloning sites; and T7 and SP6 RNA promoters for in vitro transcription of sense and antisense RNA. Other means are well known and available in the art. One can determine if the object of the method, t.e., induction of cytolysis or apoptosis, has been achieved by a reduction of cell division, differentiation of the cell or assaying for a reduction in gene overexpression. Cellular differentiation can be monitored by histological methods or by monitoring for the presence or loss of certain cell surface markers, which may be associated with an undifferentiated phenotype, e.g., the expression products of at least one gene selected from Table 1. Kits containing the agents and instructions necessary to perform the screen and in vitro method as described herein also are claimed. When the subject is an animal such as a rat or mouse, the method provides a convenient animal model system which can be used prior to clinical testing of the therapeutic agent or alternatively, for lead optimization. In this system, a candidate agent is a potential drug if gene expression is returned to a normal level or if symptoms associated or correlated to the presence of cells containing differential expression of a gene of interest are ameliorated, each as compared to untreated, animal having the pathological cells. It also can be useful to have a separate negative control group of cells or animals which are healthy and not treated, which provides a basis for comparison.
THERAPEUTIC METHODS The proteins expressed by the genes described herein all have an extracellular component that can bind a ligand, such as a polyclonal or a monoclonal antibody as well as small molecules that bind to the extracellular portion of these receptors. Thus, these ligands are useful as therapeutic agents to inhibit growth or induce cytolysis or cell death of cells expressing these receptors. Therapeutic agents also include immune effector cells that specifically recognize and lyse cells expressing a gene identified in Table 1. One can determine if a subject or patient will be beneficially treated by the use of these immune effector cells by screening one or more of the effector cells against tumor cells isolated from the subject or patient using methods known in the art. In one embodiment, the therapeutic agent is administered in an amount effective to treat lung cancer. In a further preferred embodiment, an agent of the invention is administered in an amount effective to treat cell lung cancer. Therapeutics of the invention can also be used to prevent progression from a pre- neoplastic or non-malignant state into a neoplastic or a malignant state. Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a therapeutic agent of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, expression by recombinant cells, receptor-mediated endocytosis (See, e.g., Wu and Wu, (1987), J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432), construction of a therapeutic nucleic acid as part of a retroviral or other vector, etc. Methods of delivery include but are not limited to intra-arterial, intra-muscular, intravenous, intranasal, and oral routes. Ln a specific embodiment, it may be desirable to administer the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, by injection, or by means of a catheter. The agents identified herein as effective for their intended purpose can be administered to subjects or individuals susceptible to or at risk of developing a disease correlated to the differential expression of a gene of Table 1. When the agent is administered to a subject such as a mouse, a rat or a human patient, the agent can be added to a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and systemically or topically administered to the subject. To determine patients that can be beneficially treated, a tumor sample is removed from the patient and the cells are assayed for the differential expression of the gene. Therapeutic amounts can be empirically determined and will vary with the pathology being treated, the subject being treated and the efficacy and toxicity of the agent. When delivered to an animal, the method is useful to further confirm efficacy of the agent. As an example of an animal model, groups of nude mice (Balb/c NCR nu/nu female, Simonsen, Gilroy, CA) are each subcutaneously inoculated with about 105 to about 109 hyperproliferative, cancer or target cells as defined herein. When the tumor is established, the agent is administered, for example, by subcutaneous injection around the tumor. Tumor measurements to determine reduction of tumor size are made in two dimensions using venier calipers twice a week. Other animal models may also be employed as appropriate. Administration in vivo can be effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently throughout the course of treatment. Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and will vary with the composition used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations can be carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician. Suitable dosage formulations and methods of administering the agents can be found below. The agents and compositions of the present invention can be used in the manufacture of medicaments and for the treatment of humans and other animals by administration in accordance with conventional procedures, such as an active ingredient in pharmaceutical compositions. The pharmaceutical compositions can be administered orally, intranasally, parenterally or by inhalation therapy, and may take the form of tablets, lozenges, granules, capsules, pills, ampoules, suppositories or aerosol form. They may also take the form of suspensions, solutions and emulsions of the active ingredient in aqueous or nonaqueous diluents, syrups, granulates or powders. Ln addition to an agent of the present invention, the pharmaceutical compositions can also contain other pharmaceutically active compounds or a plurality of compounds of the invention. More particularly, an agent of the present invention also referred to herein as the active ingredient, may be administered for therapy by any suitable route including oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including transdermal, aerosol, buccal and sublingual), vaginal, parental (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) and pulmonary. It will also be appreciated that the preferred route will vary with the condition and age of the recipient, and the disease being treated. Ideally, the agent should be administered to achieve peak concentrations of the active compound at sites of disease. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of the agent, optionally in saline, or orally administered, for example, as a tablet, capsule or syrup containing the active ingredient. Desirable blood levels of the agent may be maintained by a continuous infusion to provide a therapeutic amount of the active ingredient within disease tissue. The use of operative combinations is contemplated to provide therapeutic combinations requiring a lower total dosage of each component antiviral agent than may be required when each individual therapeutic compound or drug is used alone, thereby reducing adverse effects. While it is possible for the agent to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical formulation comprising at least one active ingredient, as defined above, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers therefor and optionally other therapeutic agents. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Formulations include those suitable for oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including transdermal, buccal and sublingual), vaginal, parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) and pulmonary administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then if necessary shaping the product. Formulations of the present invention suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion. The active ingredient may also be presented a bolus, electuary or paste. A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free- flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder (e.g. , povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (e.g., sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium ' carboxymethyl cellulose) surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile. Tablets may optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach. Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier. Pharmaceutical compositions for topical administration according to the present invention may be formulated as an ointment, cream, suspension, lotion, powder, solution, past, gel, spray, aerosol or oil. Alternatively, a formulation may comprise a patch or a dressing such as a bandage or adhesive plaster impregnated with active ingredients and optionally one or more excipients or diluents. If desired, the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane- 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the agent through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimefhylsulfoxide and related analogues. The oily phase of the emulsions of this invention may be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While this phase may comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), it desirably comprises a mixture of at lease one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and/or fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations. Emulgents and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the present invention include Tween 60, Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulphate. The choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties, since the solubility of the active compound in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations is very low. Thus the cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non-staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers. Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required. Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils can be used. Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the agent. Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate. Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the agent, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate. Formulations suitable for nasal administration, wherein the carrier is a solid, include a coarse powder having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which is administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e., by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose. Suitable formulations wherein the carrier is a liquid for administration as, for example, nasal spray, nasal drops, or by aerosol administration by nebulizer, include aqueous or oily solutions of the agent. Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non- aqueous isotonic sterile injection solutions which may contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents, and liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the compound to blood components or one or more organs. The formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described. Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit, daily subdose, as herein above-recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of an agent. It should be understood that in addition to the ingredients particularly mentioned above, the formulations of this invention may include other agents conventional in the art having regard to the type of formulation in question, for example, those suitable for oral administration may include such further agents as sweeteners, thickeners and flavoring agents. It also is intended that the agents, compositions and methods of this invention be combined with other suitable compositions and therapies.
TRANSGENIC ANIMALS In another aspect, the genes of Table 1 can be used to generate transgenic animal models. In recent years, geneticists have succeeded in creating transgenic animals, for example mice, by manipulating the genes of developing embryos and introducing foreign genes into these embryos. Once these genes have integrated into the genome of the recipient embryo, the resulting embryos or adult animals can be analyzed to determine the function of the gene. The mutant animals are produced to understand the function of known genes in vivo and to create animal models of human diseases. (See, e.g., Chisaka et al. (1992) 355:516-520; Joyner et al. (1992) in POSTIMPLANTATION DEVELOPMENT LN THE MOUSE (Chadwick and Marsh, eds., John Wiley & Sons, United Kingdom) ρp:277-297; Dorin et al. (1992) Nature 359:211-215). U.S. Patent Nos. 5,464,764 and 5,487,992 describe one type of transgenic animal in which the gene of interest is deleted or mutated sufficiently to disrupt its function. (See, also U.S. Patent Nos. 5,631,153 and 5,627,059). These "knock-out" animals, made by taking advantage of the phenomena of homologous recombination, can be used to study the function of a particular gene sequence in vivo. The polynucleotide sequences described herein are useful in preparing animal models of lung cancer.
ANTIBODIES Also provided by this invention is an antibody capable of specifically forming a complex with the expression product of a gene of interest. Antibodies useful in the methods of this invention are polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies. They can be chimeric, humanized, or totally human. A functional fragment of an antibody includes but is not limited to Fab, Fab', Fab2, Fab'2, and single chain variable regions. Antibodies can be produced in cell culture, in phage, or in various animals, including but not limited to cows, rabbits, goats, mice, rats, hamsters, guinea pigs, sheep, dogs, cats, monkeys, chimpanzees, apes, etc. Antibodies can be tested for specificity of binding by comparing binding to appropriate antigen to binding to irrelevant antigen or antigen mixture under a given set of conditions. If the antibody binds to the appropriate antigen at least 2, 5, 7, and preferably 10 times more than to irrelevant antigen or antigen mixture then it is considered to be specific. The monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be generated using conventional hybridoma techniques known in the art and well-described in the literature. For example, a hybridoma is produced by fusing a suitable immortal cell line (e.g., a myeloma cell line such as, but not limited to, Sp2/0, Sp2/0-AG14, NSO, NS1, NS2, AE-1, L.5, >243, P3X63Ag8.653, Sp2 SA3, Sp2 MAI, Sp2 SSI, Sp2 SA5, U397, MLA 144, ACT IV, MOLT4, DA-1, JURKAT, WEHI, K-562, COS, RAJI, NIH 3T3, HL-60, MLA 144, NAMAIWA, NEURO 2A, CHO, PerC.6, YB2/O) or the like, or heteromyelomas, fusion products thereof, or any cell or fusion cell derived therefrom, or any other suitable cell line as known in the art (see, e.g., www.atcc.org, www.lifetech.com., and the like), with antibody producing cells, such as, but not limited to, isolated or cloned spleen, peripheral blood, lymph, tonsil, or other immune or B cell containing cells, or any other cells expressing heavy or light chain constant or variable or framework or CDR sequences, either as endogenous or heterologous nucleic acid, as recombinant or endogenous, viral, bacterial, algal, prokaryotic, amphibian, insect, reptilian, fish, mammalian, rodent, equine, ovine, goat, sheep, primate, eukaryotic, genomic DNA, cDNA, rDNA, mitochondrial DNA or RNA, chloroplast DNA or RNA, hnRNA, mRNA, tRNA, single, double or triple stranded, hybridized, and the like or any combination thereof. Antibody producing cells can also be obtained from the peripheral blood or, preferably the spleen or lymph nodes, of humans or other suitable animals that have been immunized with the antigen of interest. Any other suitable host cell can also be used for expressing-heterologous or endogenous nucleic acid encoding an antibody, specified fragment or variant thereof, of the present invention. The fused cells (hybridomas) or recombinant cells can be isolated using selective culture conditions or other suitable known methods, and cloned by limiting dilution or cell sorting, or other known methods. Other suitable methods of producing or isolating antibodies of the requisite specificity can be used, including, but not limited to, methods that select recombinant antibody from a peptide or protein library (e.g., but not limited to, a bacteriophage, ribosome, oligonucleotide, RNA, cDNA, or the like, display library; e.g., as available from various commercial vendors such as Cambridge Antibody Technologies
(Cambridgeshire, UK), MorphoSys (Martinsreid/Planegg, Del.), Biovation (Aberdeen, Scotland, UK) Biolnvent (Lund, Sweden), using methods known in the art. See U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,704,692; 5,723,323; 5,763,192; 5,814,476; 5,817,483; 5,824,514; 5,976,862. Alternative methods rely upon immunization of transgenic animals (e.g., SCID mice, Nguyen et al. (1977) Microbiol. Immunol. 41 :901 -907 (1997); Sandhu et al., (1996) Crit. Rev. Biotechnol. 16:95-118; Eren et al. (1998) Immunol. 93:154-161) that are capable of producing a repertoire of human antibodies, as known in the art and/or as described herein. Such techniques, include, but are not limited to, ribosome display (Hanes et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 94:4937-4942; Hanes et al., (1998) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 95:14130-14135); single cell antibody producing technologies (e.g., selected lymphocyte antibody method ("SLAM") (U.S. Pat. No. 5,627,052, Wen et al. (1987) J. hnmunol. 17:887-892; Babcook et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1996) 93:7843-7848); gel microdroplet and flow cytometry (Powell et al. (1990) Biotechnol. 8:333-337; One Cell Systems, (Cambridge, Mass).; Gray et al. (1995) J. hnm. Meth. 182:155-163; Kenny et al. (1995) Bio/Technol. 13:787-790); B-cell selection (Steenbakkers et al. (1994) Molec. Biol. Reports 19:125-134 (1994). Antibody variants of the present invention can also be prepared using delivering a polynucleotide encoding an antibody of this invention to a suitable host such as to provide transgenic animals or mammals, such as goats, cows, horses, sheep, and the like, that produce such antibodies in their milk. These methods are known in the art and are described for example in U.S. Pat Nos. 5,827,690; 5,849,992; 4,873,316; 5,849,992; 5,994,616; 5,565,362; and 5,304,489. The term "antibody variant" includes post-translational modification to linear polypeptide sequence of the antibody or fragment. For example, U.S. Patent No. 6,602,684 Bl describes a method for the generation of modified glycol-forms of antibodies, including whole antibody molecules, antibody fragments, or fusion proteins that include a region equivalent to the Fc region of an immunoglobulin, having enhanced Fc-mediated cellular toxicity, and glycoproteins so generated. Antibody variants also can be prepared by delivering a polynucleotide of this invention to provide transgenic plants and cultured plant cells (e.g., but not limited to tobacco, maize, and duckweed) that produce such antibodies, specified portions or variants in the plant parts or in cells cultured therefrom. For example, Cramer et al. (1999) Curr. Top. Microbol. Immunol. 240:95-118 and references cited therein, describe the production of transgenic tobacco leaves expressing large amounts of recombinant proteins, e.g., using an inducible promoter. Transgenic maize have been used to express mammalian proteins at commercial production levels, with biological activities equivalent to those produced in other recombinant systems or purified from natural sources. See, e.g., Hood et al, Adv. Exp. Med. Biol. (1999) 464:127-147 and references cited therein. Antibody variants have also been produced in large amounts from transgenic plant seeds including antibody fragments, such as single chain antibodies (scFv's), including tobacco seeds and potato tubers. See, e.g., Conrad et al.(1998) Plant Mol. Biol. 38:101-109 and reference cited therein. Thus, antibodies of the present invention can also be produced using transgenic plants, according to know methods. Antibody derivatives can be produced, for example, by adding exogenous sequences to modify immunogenicity or reduce, enhance or modify binding, affinity, on-rate, off-rate, avidity, specificity, half-life, or any other suitable characteristic. Generally part or all of the non-human or human CDR sequences are maintained while the non-human sequences of the variable and constant regions are replaced with human or other amino acids. In general, the CDR residues are directly and most substantially involved in influencing antigen binding. Humanization or engineering of antibodies of the present invention can be performed using any known method, such as but not limited to those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,723,323, 5,976,862, 5,824,514, 5,817,483, 5,814,476, 5,763,192, 5,723,323, 5,766,886, 5,714,352, 6,204,023, 6,180,370, 5,693,762, 5,530,101, 5,585,089, 5,225,539; and 4,816,567. Techniques for making partially to fully human antibodies are known in the art and any such techniques can be used. According to one embodiment, fully human antibody sequences are made in a transgenic mouse which has been engineered to express human heavy and light chain antibody genes. Multiple strains of such transgenic mice have been made which can produce different classes of antibodies. B cells from transgenic mice which are producing a desirable antibody can be fused to make hybridoma cell lines for continuous production of the desired antibody. (See for example, Russel, N.D. et al. (2000) Infection and Immunity April 2000: 1820-1826; Gallo, M. L. et al. (2000) European J. of Immun. 30:534-540; Green, L. L. (1999) J. of Immun. Methods 231:11-23; Yang, X-D et al. (1999A) J. of Leukocyte Biology 66:401-410; Yang, X-D (1999B) Cancer Research 59(6): 1236- 1243; Jakobovits, A. (1998) Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 31:33-42; Green, L. and Jakobovits, A. (1998) J. Exp. Med. 188(3):483-495; Jakobovits, A. (1998) Exp. Opin. Invest. Drags 7(4):607-614; Tsuda, H. et al. (1997) Genomics 42:413-421; Sherman-Gold, R. (1997). Genetic Engineering News 17(14); Mendez, M. et al. (1997) Nature Genetics 15:146-156; Jakobovits, A. (1996) WEIR'S HANDBOOK OF EXPERIMENTAL IMMUNOLOGY, THE INTEGRATED IMMUNE SYSTEM VOL. IV, 194.1-194.7; Jakobovits, A. (1995) Current Opinion in Biotechnology 6:561-566; Mendez, M. et al. (1995)
Genomics 26:294-307; Jakobovits, A. (1994) Current Biology 4(8):761-763; Arbones, M. et al. (1994) Immunity l(4):247-260; Jakobovits, A. (1993) Nature 362(6417):255-258; Jakobovits, A. et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90(6):2551-2555; Kucherlapati, et al. U.S. Patent No. 6,075,181.) Human monoclonal antibodies can also be produced by a hybridoma which includes a B cell obtained from a transgenic nonhuman animal, e.g., a transgenic mouse, having a genome comprising a human heavy chain transgene and a light chain transgene fused to an immortalized cell. These antibodies can be modified to create chimeric antibodies. Chimeric antibodies are those in which the various domains of the antibodies' heavy and light chains are coded for by DNA from more than one species. See, e.g., U.S. Patent No.: 4,816,567. The term "antibody derivative" also includes "diabodies" which are small antibody fragments with two antigen-binding sites, wherein fragments comprise a heavy chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light chain variable domain (VL) in the same polypeptide chain (VH V_). See for example, EP 404,097; WO 93/11161; and HoUinger et al, (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-6448. By using a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain, the domains are forced to pair with the complementary domains of another chain and create two antigen-binding sites. See also, U.S. Patent No. 6,632,926 to Chen et al. which discloses antibody variants that have one or more amino acids inserted into a hypervariable region of the parent antibody and a binding affinity for a target antigen which is at least about two fold stronger than the binding affinity of the parent antibody for the antigen. The term "antibody derivative" further includes "linear antibodies". The procedure for making the is known in the art and described in Zapata et al. (1995) Protein Eng. 8(10):1057-1062. Briefly, these antibodies comprise a pair of tandem Fd segments (VH -CH 1-VH -CHI) which form a pair of antigen binding regions. Linear antibodies can be bispecific or monospecific. The antibodies of this invention can be recovered and purified from recombinant cell cultures by known methods including, but not limited to, protein A purification, ammonium sulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cation exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography and lectin chromatography. High performance liquid chromatography ("HPLC") can also be used for purification. Antibodies of the present invention include naturally purified products, products of chemical synthetic procedures, and products produced by recombinant techniques from a eukaryotic host, including, for example, yeast, higher plant, insect and mammalian cells, or alternatively from a prokaryotic cells as described above. In some aspects of this invention, it will be useful to detectably or therapeutically label the antibody. Methods for conjugating antibodies to these agents are known in the art. For the purpose of illustration only, antibodies can be labeled with a detectable moiety such as a radioactive atom, a chromophore, a fluorophore, or the like. Such labeled antibodies can be used for diagnostic techniques, either in vivo, or in an isolated test sample. Antibodies can also be conjugated, for example, to a pharmaceutical agent, such as chemotherapeutic drug or a toxin. They can be linked to a cytokine, to a ligand, to another antibody. Suitable agents for coupling to antibodies to achieve an anti-tumor effect include cytokines, such as interleukin 2 (IL- 2) and Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF); photosensitizers, for use in photodynamic therapy, including aluminum (III) phthalocyanine tetrasulfonate, hematoporphyrin, and phthalocyanine; radionuclides, such as iodine-131 (131I), yttrium-90 (90Y), bismuth-212 (212Bi), bismuth-213 (213Bi), technetium-99m (99mTc), rhenium- 186 (186Re), and rhenium-188 (188Re); antibiotics, such as doxorubicin, adriamycin, daunorubicin, methotrexate, daunomycin, neocarzinostatin, and carboplatin; bacterial, plant, and other toxins, such as diphtheria toxin, pseudomonas exotoxin A, staphylococcal enterotoxin A, abrin-A toxin, ricin A (deglycosylated ricin A and native ricin A), TGF-alpha toxin, cytotoxin from Chinese cobra (naja naja atra), and gelonin (a plant toxin); ribosome inactivating proteins from plants, bacteria and fungi, such as restrictocin (a ribosome inactivating protein produced by Aspergillus restrictus), saporin (a ribosome inactivating protein from Saponaria officinalis), and RNase; tyrosine kinase inhibitors; ly207702 (a difluorinated purine nucleoside); liposomes containing anti cystic agents (e.g., antisense oligonucleotides, plasmids which encode for toxins, methotrexate, etc.); and other antibodies or antibody fragments, such as F(ab). With respect to preparations containing antibodies covalently linked to organic molecules, they can be prepared using suitable methods, such as by reaction with one or more modifying agents. Examples of such include modifying and activating groups. A "modifying agent" as the term is used herein, refers to a suitable organic group (e.g., hydrophilic polymer, a fatty acid, a fatty acid ester) that comprises an activating group. Specific examples of these are provided supra. An "activating group" is a chemical moiety or functional group that can, under appropriate conditions, react with a second chemical group thereby forming a covalent bond between the modifying agent and the second chemical group. Examples of such are electrophilic groups such as tosylate, mesylate, halo (chloro, bromo, fluoro, iodo), N- hydroxysuccinimidyl esters (NHS), and the like. Activating groups that can react with thiols include, for example, maleimide, iodoacetyl, acrylolyl, pyridyl disulfϊdes, 5- thiol-2-nitrobenzoic acid thiol (TNB-thiol), and the like. An aldehyde functional group can be coupled to amine- or hydrazide-containing molecules, and an azide group can react with a trivalent phosphorous group to form phosphoramidate or phosphorimide linkages. Suitable methods to introduce activating groups into molecules are known in the art. See for example, Hermanson, G. T., BIOCONJUGATE TECHNIQUES, Academic Press: San Diego, Calif. (1996). An activating group can be bonded directly to the organic group (e.g., hydrophilic polymer, fatty acid, fatty acid ester), or through a linker moiety, for example a divalent
Figure imgf000061_0001
group wherein one or more carbon atoms can be replaced by a heteroatom such as oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur. Suitable linker moieties include, for example, tetraethylene glycol. Modifying agents that comprise a linker moiety can be produced, for example, by reacting a mono-Boc-alkyldiamine (e.g., mono-Boc- ethylenediamine, mono-Boc-diaminohexane) with a fatty acid in the presence of 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminoproρyl)carbodiimide (EDC) to form an amide bond between the free amine and the fatty acid carboxylate. The Boc protecting group can be removed from the product by treatment with trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) to expose a primary amine that can be coupled to another carboxylate as described, or can be reacted with aleic anhydride and the resulting product cyclized to produce an activated maleimido derivative of the fatty acid. The modified antibodies of the invention can be produced by reacting a human antibody or antigen-binding fragment with a modifying agent. For example, the organic moieties can be bonded to the antibody in a non-site specific manner by employing an amine-reactive modifying agent, for example, an NHS ester of PEG. Modified human antibodies or antigen-binding fragments can also be prepared by reducing disulfide bonds (e.g., intra-chain disulfide bonds) of an antibody or antigen- binding fragment. The reduced antibody or antigen-binding fragment can then be reacted with a thiol-reactive modifying agent to produce the modified antibody of the invention. Modified human antibodies and antigen-binding fragments comprising an organic moiety that is bonded to specific sites of an antibody of the present invention can be prepared using suitable methods, such as reverse proteolysis. See generally, Hermanson, G. T., BIOCONJUGATE TECHNIQUES, Academic Press: San Diego, Calif. (1996). The antibodies of the invention also can be bound to many different carriers. Thus, this invention also provides compositions containing the antibodies and another substance, active or inert. Examples of well-known carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, agaroses and magnetite. The nature of the carrier can be either soluble or insoluble for purposes of the invention. Those skilled in the art will know of other suitable carriers for binding monoclonal antibodies, or will be able to ascertain such, using routine experimentation. Compositions containing the antibodies, fragments thereof or cell lines which produce the antibodies, are encompassed by this invention. When these compositions are to be used pharmaceutically, they are combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
ANTIGEN-PRESENTING CELLS In another embodiment the present invention provides a method of inducing an immune response comprising delivering the compounds and compositions of the invention in the context of an MHC molecule. Thus, the polypeptides of this invention can be pulsed into antigen presenting cells using the methods described herein. Antigen-presenting cells, include, but are not limited to dendritic cells (DCs), monocytes/macrophages, B lymphocytes or other cell type(s) expressing the necessary MHC/co-stimulatory molecules. The methods described below focus primarily on DCs which are the most potent, preferred APCs. These host cells containing the polypeptides or proteins are further provided. Isolated host cells which present the polypeptides of this invention in the context of MHC molecules are further useful to expand and isolate a population of educated, antigen-specific immune effector cells. The irnmune effector cells, e.g., cytotoxic T lymphocytes, are produced by culturing naϊve immune effector cells with antigen-presenting cells which present the polypeptides in the context of MHC molecules on the surface of the APCs. The population can be purified using methods known in the art, e.g., FACS analysis or ficoll gradient. The methods to generate and culture the immune effector cells as well as the populations produced thereby also are the inventor's contribution and invention. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising the cells and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are useful in adoptive immunotherapy. Prior to administration in vivo, the immune effector cells are screened in vitro for their ability to lyse tumor cells In one embodiment, the immune effector cells and/or the APCs are genetically modified. Using standard gene transfer, genes coding for co-stimulatory molecules and/or stimulatory cytokines can be inserted prior to, concurrent to or subsequent to expansion of the immune effector cells. This invention also provides methods of inducing an immune response in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amoimt of a polypeptide described above under the conditions that induce an immune response to the polypeptide. The polypeptide can be administered in a formulation or as a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide. The polynucleotide can be administered in a gene delivery vehicle or by inserting into a host cell which in turn recombinantly transcribes, translates and processed the encoded polypeptide. Isolated host cells containing the polynucleotides of this invention in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can therefore be combined with appropriate and effective amount of an adjuvant, cytokine or co-stimulatory molecule for an effective vaccine regimen. Ln one embodiment, the host cell is an APC such as a dendritic cell. The host cell can be further modified by inserting of a polynucleotide coding for an effective amount of either or both a cytokine and/or a co-stimulatory molecule. The methods of this invention can be further modified by co-administering an effective amount of a cytokine or co-stimulatory molecule to the subject. This invention also provides compositions containing any of the above- mentioned proteins, polypeptides, polynucleotides, vectors, cells, antibodies and fragments thereof, and an acceptable solid or liquid carrier. When the compositions are used pharmaceutically, they are combined with a "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" for diagnostic and therapeutic use.
Isolation, Culturing and Expansion of APCs, Including Dendritic Cells The following is a brief description of two fundamental approaches for the isolation of APC. These approaches involve (1) isolating bone marrow precursor cells (CD34+) from blood and stimulating them to differentiate into APC; or (2) collecting the precommitted APCs from peripheral blood, hi the first approach, the patient must be treated with cytokines such as GM-CSF to boost the number of circulating CD34+ stem cells in the peripheral blood. The second approach for isolating APCs is to collect the relatively large numbers of precommitted APCs already circulating in the blood. Previous techniques for isolating committed APCs from human peripheral blood have involved combinations of physical procedures such as metrizamide gradients and adherence/non-adherence steps (Freudenthal P.S. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:7698-7702); Percoll gradient separations (Mehta-Damani et al. (1994) J. Immunol. 153:996-1003); and fluorescence activated cell sorting techniques (Thomas R. et al. (1993) J. hnmunol. 151:6840-6852). One technique for separating large numbers of cells from one another is known as countercurrent centrifugal elutriation (CCE). hi this technique, cells are subject to simultaneous centrifugation and a washout stream of buffer that is constantly increasing in flow rate. The constantly increasing countercurrent flow of buffer leads to fractional cell separations that are largely based on cell size. In one aspect of the invention, the APC are precommitted or mature dendritic cells which can be isolated from the white blood cell fraction of a mammal, such as a murine, simian or a human (See, e.g., WO 96/23060). The white blood cell fraction can be from the peripheral blood of the mammal. This method includes the following steps: (a) providing a white blood cell fraction obtained from a mammalian source by methods known in the art such as leukapheresis; (b) separating the white blood cell fraction of step (a) into four or more subtractions by countercurrent centrifugal elutriation; (c) stimulating conversion of monocytes in one or more fractions from step (b) to dendritic cells by contacting the cells with calcium ionophore, GM-CSF and IL-13 or GM-CSF and IL-4, (d) identifying the dendritic cell-enriched fraction from step (c); and (e) collecting the enriched fraction of step (d), is performed at about 4°C. One way to identify the dendritic cell-enriched fraction is by fluorescence- activated cell sorting. The white blood cell fraction can be treated with calcium ionophore in the presence of other cytokines, such as recombinant (rh) rhIL-12, rhGM-CSF, or rhIL-4. The cells of the white blood cell fraction can be washed in buffer and suspended in Ca^/Mg"1"4" free media prior to the separating step. The white blood cell fraction can be obtained by leukapheresis. The dendritic cells can be identified by the presence of at least one of the following markers: HLA-DR, HLA- DQ, or B7. 2, and the simultaneous absence of the following markers: CD3, CD14, CD16, 56, 57, and CD 19, 20. Monoclonal antibodies specific to these cell surface markers are commercially available. More specifically, the method requires collecting an enriched collection of white cells and platelets from leukapheresis that is then further fractionated by countercurrent centrifugal elutriation (CCE) (Abrahamsen T.G. et al. (1991) J. Clin. Apheresis. 6:48-53). Cell samples are placed in a special elutriation rotor. The rotor is then spun at a constant speed of, for example, 3000 rpm. Once the rotor has reached the desired speed, pressurized air is used to control the flow rate of cells. Cells in the elutriator are subjected to simultaneous centrifugation and a washout stream of buffer that is constantly increasing in flow rate. This results in fractional cell separations based largely but not exclusively on differences in cell size. Quality control of APC and more specifically DC collection and confirmation of their successful activation in culture is dependent upon a simultaneous multi-color FACS analysis technique which monitors both monocytes and the dendritic cell subpopulation as well as possible contaminant T lymphocytes. It is based upon the fact that DCs do not express the following markers: CD3 (T cell); CD14 (monocyte); CD16, 56, 57 (NK/LAK cells); CD19, 20 (B cells). At the same time, DCs do express large quantities of HLA-DR, significant HLA-DQ and B7.2 (but little or no B7.1) at the time they are circulating in the blood (in addition they express Leu M7 and M9, myeloid markers which are also expressed by monocytes and neutrophils). When combined with a third color reagent for analysis of dead cells, propidium iodide (PI), it is possible to make positive identification of all cell subpopulations (see Table 2): TABLE 2 FACS analysis of fresh peripheral cell subpopulations
Figure imgf000066_0001
Additional markers can be substituted for additional analysis: Color #1 : CD3 alone, CD14 alone, etc.; Leu M7 or Leu M9; anti-Class I, etc. Color #2: HLA-DQ, B7.1, B7.2, CD25 (IL2r), ICAM, LFA-3, etc.
The goal of FACS analysis at the time of collection is to confirm that the DCs are enriched in the expected fractions, to monitor neutrophil contamination, and to make sure that appropriate markers are expressed. This rapid bulk collection of enriched DCs from human peripheral blood, suitable for clinical applications, is absolutely dependent on the analytic FACS technique described above for quality control. If need be, mature DCs can be immediately separated from monocytes at this point by fluorescent sorting for "cocktail negative" cells. It may not be necessary to routinely separate DCs from monocytes because, as will be detailed below, the monocytes themselves are still capable of differentiating into DCs or functional DC- like cells in culture. Once collected, the DC rich/monocyte APC fractions (usually 150 through 190) can be pooled and cryopreserved for future use, or immediately placed in short term culture. Alternatively, others have reported a method for upregulating (activating) dendritic cells and converting monocytes to an activated dendritic cell phenotype. This method involves the addition of calcium ionophore to the culture media to convert monocytes into activated dendritic cells. Adding the calcium ionophore A23187, for example, at the beginning of a 24 to 48 hour culture period resulted in uniform activation and dendritic cell phenotypic conversion of the pooled "monocyte plus DC" fractions: characteristically, the activated population becomes uniformly CD 14 (Leu M3) negative, and upregulates HLA-DR, HLA-DQ, ICAM-1, B7.1, and B7.2. Furthermore, this activated bulk population functions as well on a small numbers basis and is easily purified. Specific combination(s) of cytokines have been used successfully to amplify (or partially substitute) for the activation/conversion achieved with calcium ionophore: these cytokines include but are not limited to purified or recombinant ("rh") rhGM-CSF, rhIL-2, and rhIL-4. Each cytokine when given alone is inadequate for optimal upregulation.
Presentation of Antigen to the APC Polypeptides expressed from the genes of Table 1, can be delivered to antigen- presenting cells as protein/peptide or in the form of cDNA encoding the protein/peptide. Antigen-presenting cells (APCs) can consist of dendritic cells (DCs), monocytes/macrophages, B lymphocytes or other cell type(s) expressing the necessary MHC/co-stimulatory molecules. The methods described below focus primarily on DCs which are the most potent, preferred APCs. Pulsing is accomplished in vitro/ex vivo by exposing APCs to the antigenic protein or peptide(s) of this invention. The protein or peptide(s) is added to APCs at a concentration of 1-10 μm for approximately 3 hours. Pulsed APCs can subsequently be administered to the host via an intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery. Protein/peptide antigen can also be delivered in vivo with adjuvant via the intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery. Paglia et al. (1996) J. Exp. Med. 183:317-322, has shown that APC incubated with whole protein in vitro were recognized by MHC class I-restricted CTLs, and that immunization of animals with these APCs led to the development of antigen-specific CTLs in vivo. In addition, several different techniques have been described which lead to the expression of antigen in the cytosol of APCs, such as DCs. These include (1) the introduction into the APCs of RNA isolated from tumor cells, (2) infection of APCs with recombinant vectors to induce endogenous expression of antigen, and (3) introduction of tumor antigen into the DC cytosol using liposomes. (See Boczkowski D. et al. (1996) J. Exp. Med. 184:465-472; Rouse et al. (1994) J. Nirol. 68:5685- 5689; and Νair et al. (1992) J. Exp. Med. 175:609-612).
Foster Antigen Presenting Cells Foster APCs are derived from the human cell line 174xCEM.T2, referred to as T2, which contains a mutation in its antigen processing pathway that restricts the association of endogenous peptides with cell surface MHC class I molecules (Zweerink et al. (1993) J. Immunol. 150:1763-1771). This is due to a large homozygous deletion in the MHC class II region encompassing the genes TAP1, TAP2, LMP1, and LMP2, which are required for antigen presentation to MHC class 1 -restricted CD8+ CTLs. In effect, only "empty" MHC class I molecules are presented on the surface of these cells. Exogenous peptide added to the culture medium binds to these MHC molecules provided that the peptide contains the allele- specific binding motif. These T2 cells are referred to herein as "foster" APCs. They can be used in conjunction with this invention to present antigen(s). Transduction of T2 cells with specific recombinant MHC alleles allows for redirection of the MHC restriction profile. Libraries tailored to the recombinant allele will be preferentially presented by them because the anchor residues will prevent efficient binding to the endogenous allele. High level expression of MHC molecules makes the APC more visible to the CTLs. Expressing the MHC allele of interest in T2 cells using a powerful transcriptional promoter (e.g., the CMN promoter) results in a more reactive APC (most likely due to a higher concentration of reactive MHC-peptide complexes on the cell surface).
Immunogenicity Assays The immunogenicity of therapeutic agents of this invention can be determined by known methodologies including, but not limited to those exemplified below, hi one embodiment, such methodology may be employed to compare an equivalent polypeptide ligand of the invention with the corresponding native ligand. For example, an altered ligand may be considered "more active" if it compares favorably with the activity of the native ligand in any one of the following assays. For some purposes, one skilled in the art will select an immunogenic ligand which displays more activity than another immunogenic ligand, i.e., for treatment and/or diagnostic purposes. However, for some applications, the use of an immunogenic ligand which is comparable with the native ligand will be suitable, hi other situations, it may be desirable to utilize an immunogenic ligand which is less active. It has been suggested that such levels of activity positively correlate with the level of immunogenicity. 1. 51Cr-release lysis assay. Lysis of peptide-pulsed 51Cr-labeled targets by antigen-specific T cells can be compared for target cells pulsed with either the native or altered ligands. Functionally enhanced ligands will show greater lysis of targets as a function of time. The kinetics of lysis as well as overall target lysis at a fixed timepoint (e.g., 4 hours) may be used to evaluate ligand performance. (Ware C.F. et al. (1983) J. Immunol. 131:1312). 2. Cytokine-release assay. Analysis of the types and quantities of cytokines secreted by T cells upon contacting ligand-pulsed targets can be a measure of functional activity. Cytokines can be measured by ELISA or ELISPOT assays to determine the rate and total amount of cytokine production. (Fujihashi K. et al. (1993) J. Immunol. Meth. 160:181; Tanguay S. and Killion J.J. (1994) Lymphokine Cytokine Res. 13:259). 3. In vitro T cell education. The ligands of the invention can be compared to the corresponding native ligand for the ability to elicit ligand-reactive T cell populations from normal donor or patient-derived PBMC. In this system, elicited T cells can be tested for lytic activity, cytokine-release, polyclonality, and cross- reactivity to the native ligand. (Parkhurst M.R. et al. (1996) J. Immunol. 157:2539). 4. Transgenic animal models. Immunogenicity can be assessed in vivo by vaccinating HLA transgenic mice with either the ligands of the invention or the native ligand and determining the nature and magnitude of the induced immune response. Alternatively, the hu-PBL-SCID mouse model allows reconstitution of a human immune system in a mouse by adoptive transfer of human PBL. These animals may be vaccinated with the ligands and analyzed for immune response as previously mentioned. (Shirai M. et al. (1995) J. Immunol. 154:2733; Mosier D.E. et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:2443). 5. Proliferation. T cells will proliferate in response to reactive ligands. Proliferation can be monitored quantitatively by measuring, for example, 3H- thymidine uptake. (Caruso A. et al. (1997) Cytometry 27:71). 6. Tetramer staining. MHC tetramers can be loaded with individual ligands and tested for their relative abilities to bind to appropriate effector T cell populations. (Altman J.D. et al. (1996) Science 274(5284):94-96). 7. MHC Stabilization. Exposure of certain cell lines such as T2 cells to
HLA-binding ligands results in the stabilization of MHC complexes on the cell surface. Quantitation of MHC complexes on the cell surface has been correlated with the affinity of the ligand for the HLA allele that is stabilized. Thus, this technique can determine the relative HLA affinity of ligand epitopes. (Stuber G. et al. (1995) Int. Immunol. 7:653). 8. MHC competition. The ability of a ligand to interfere with the functional activity of a reference ligand and its cognate T cell effectors is a measure of how well a ligand can compete for MHC binding. Measuring the relative levels of inhibition is an indicator of MHC affinity. (Feltkamp M.C. et al. (1995) hnmunol. Lett. 47:1). 9. Primate models. A recently described non-human primate
(chimpanzee) model system can be utilized to monitor in vivo immunogenicities of HLA-restricted ligands. It has been demonstrated that chimpanzees share overlapping MHC-ligand specificities with human MHC molecules thus allowing one to test HLA-restricted ligands for relative in vivo immunogenicity. (Bertoni R. et al. (1998) J. Immunol. 161:4447). 10. Monitoring TCR Signal Transduction Events. Several intracellular signal transduction events (e.g., phosphorylation) are associated with successful TCR engagement by MHC-ligand complexes. The qualitative and quantitative analysis of these events have been correlated with the relative abilities of ligands to activate effector cells through TCR engagement. (Salazar E. et al. (2000) Int. J. Cancer 85:829; Isakov N. et al. (1995) J. Exp. Med. 181:375).
Expansion of Immune Effector Cells The present invention makes use of these APCs to stimulate production of an enriched population of antigen-specific immune effector cells. The antigen-specific immune effector cells are expanded at the expense of the APCs, which die in the culture. The process by which naϊve immune effector cells become educated by other cells is described essentially in Coulie (1997) Molec. Med. Today 3:261-268. The APCs prepared as described above are mixed with naϊve immune effector cells. The cells may be cultured in the presence of a cytokine, for example IL-2. Because dendritic cells secrete potent immunostimulatory cytokines, such as IL-12, it may not be necessary to add supplemental cytokines during the first and successive rounds of expansion, hi any event, the culture conditions are such that the antigen- specific immune effector cells expand (i.e., proliferate) at a much higher rate than the APCs. Multiple infusions of APCs and optional cytokines can be performed to further expand the population of antigen-specific cells. In one embodiment, the immune effector cells are T cells. In a separate embodiment, the immune effector cells can be genetically modified by transduction with a transgene coding for example, IL-2, IL-11 or IL-13. Methods for introducing transgenes in vitro, ex vivo and in vivo are known in the art. See Sambrook et al. (1989) supra. APCs can be transduced with viral vectors encoding a relevant polypeptides. The most common viral vectors include recombinant poxvirases such as vaccinia and fowlpox virus (Bronte et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:3183-3188; Kim et al. (1997) J. hnmunother. 20:276-286) and as an example adenovirus (Arthur et al. (1997) J. Immunol. 159:1393-1403; Wan et al. (1997) Human Gene Therapy 8:1355- 1363; Huang et al. (1995) J. Virol. 69:2257-2263). Rerrovirus also maybe used for transduction of human APCs (Marin et al. (1996) J. Virol. 70:2957-2962). In vitro/ex vivo, exposure of human DCs to adenovirus (Ad) vector at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 500 for 16-24 h in a minimal volume of serum-free medium reliably gives rise to transgene expression in 90-100% of DCs. The efficiency of transduction of DCs or other APCs can be assessed by inimunofluorescence using fluorescent antibodies specific for the tumor antigen being expressed (Kim et al. (1997) J. hnmunother. 20:276-286). Alternatively, the antibodies can be conjugated to an enzyme (e.g., HRP) giving rise to a colored product upon reaction with the substrate. The actual amount of antigenic polypeptides being expressed by the APCs can be evaluated by ELISA. Transduced APCs can subsequently be administered to the host via an intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery. In vivo transduction of DCs, or other APCs, can be accomplished by administration of Ad (or other viral vectors) via different routes including intravenous, intramuscular, intranasal, intraperitoneal or cutaneous delivery. Ln one embodiment, the method is cutaneous delivery of Ad vector at multiple sites using a total dose of approximately lxlOIO-lx 1012 i.u. Levels of in vivo transduction can be roughly assessed by co-staining with antibodies directed against APC marker(s) and the TAA being expressed. The staining procedure can be carried out on biopsy samples from the site of administration or on cells from draining lymph nodes or other organs where APCs (in particular DCs) may have migrated (Condon et al. (1996) Nature Med. 2:1122-1128 and Wan et al. (1997) Hum. Gene Ther. 8:1355-1363). The amount of antigen being expressed at the site of injection or in other organs where transduced APCs may have migrated can be evaluated by ELISA on tissue homogenates. Although viral gene delivery is more efficient, DCs can also be transduced in vitro/ex vivo by non- viral gene delivery methods such as electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitation or cationic lipid/plasmid DNA complexes (Arthur et al. (1997) Cancer Gene Ther. 4:17-25). Transduced APCs can subsequently be administered to the host via an intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, intramuscular or intraperitoneal route of delivery. In vivo transduction of DCs, or other APCs, can potentially be accomplished by administration of cationic lipid/plasmid DNA complexes delivered via the intravenous, intramuscular, intranasal, intraperitoneal or cutaneous route of administration. Gene gun delivery or injection of naked plasmid DNA into the skin also leads to transduction of DCs (Condon et al. (1996) Nature Med. 2:1122-1128; Raz et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:9519-9523). Intramuscular delivery of plasmid DNA may also be used for immunization (Rosato et al. (1997) Hum. Gene Ther. 8:1451-1458.) The transduction efficiency and levels of transgene expression can be assessed as described above for viral vectors. Adoptive Immunotherapy and Vaccines The expanded populations of antigen-specific immune effector cells of the present invention also find use in adoptive immunotherapy regimes and as vaccines. Adoptive immunotherapy methods involve, in one aspect, administering to a subject a substantially pure population of educated, antigen-specific immune effector cells made by culturing naϊve immune effector cells with APCs as described above. Preferably, the APCs are dendritic cells. Ln one embodiment, the adoptive immunotherapy methods described herein are autologous. In this case, the APCs are made using parental cells isolated from a single subject. The expanded population also employs T cells isolated from that subject. Finally, the expanded population of antigen-specific cells is administered to the same patient. In a further embodiment an effective amount, APCs or immune effector cells are administered with an effective amount of a stimulatory cytokine, such as IL-2 or a co-stimulatory molecule. The agents identified herein as effective for their intended purpose can be administered to subjects in need of such therapy. Method for administration of therapeutic agents are known in the art and described briefly, infra. It is to be understood that while the invention has been described in conjunction with the above embodiments, that the foregoing description and the following examples are intended to illustrate and not limit the scope of the invention. Other aspects, advantages and modifications within the scope of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art to which the invention pertains.

Claims

1. A method of aiding in the diagnosis of the neoplastic condition of a lung cell, comprising detecting at least one gene selected from the group identified in Table 1, that is expressed in a sample, wherein the amount expressed is indicative of the neoplastic condition of the lung cell.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein the amount expressed is higher in the neoplastic condition as compared to a normal cell.
3. The method of claim 1 , wherein the amount expressed is less in a neoplastic cell as compared to a normal cell.
4. The method of claim 1 , wherein the amount of gene expressed is determined by detecting the quantity of mRNA transcribed from the gene.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the amount expressed is determined by detecting the quantity of cDNA produced from the reverse transcription of the mRNA transcribed from the gene.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the amount expressed is determined by detecting the quantity of the polypeptide or protein encoded by the gene.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the lung cancer is non-small cell lung cancer.
8. A ligand that specifically recognizes and- binds a gene expression product or fragment thereof, wherein said gene expression product is at least one of the group identified in Table 1.
9. The ligand of claim 8, wherein said ligand is an antibody or fragment thereof.
10. The ligand of claim 9, wherein said antibody is a monoclonal antibody or a polyclonal antibody.
11. The ligand of claim 10, further comprising an agent selected from the group consisting of a toxin, a detectable label, an adjuvant, a delivery vector and a radioisotopic label.
12. The ligand of claim 10, further comprising a toxin.
13. A screen for a potential therapeutic agent for inducing cytolysis or apoptosis of a lung cell wherein the cell is characterized by differential expression of at least one gene selected from the group identified in Table 1, comprising contacting a sample containing said lung cell with an effective amount of a potential agent and assaying for cytoloysis or apoptosis of the lung cell.
14. A method for inducing cytolysis or apoptosis of a lung cell, wherein the cell is characterized by differential expression of at least one gene identified in Table 1, comprising contacting the lung cell with an agent identified by the method of claim 13.
15. A method for inhibiting the growth of a neoplastic lung cell, wherein the neoplastic lung cell is characterized by differential expression of at least one gene identified in Table 1, comprising contacting the lung cell with an agent identified by the method of claim 13.
16. The method of claim 14 or 15, wherein the agent further comprises a cytotoxic agent.
17. A method for inhibiting the growth of a neoplastic lung cell, comprising contacting the cell with an effective amount of an immune effector cell that specifically recognizes and lyses a cell expressing at least one gene identified in Table 1, thereby inhibiting the growth of the neoplastic lung cell.
PCT/US2004/040576 2003-12-02 2004-12-02 Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer WO2005055808A2 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006542803A JP2007518399A (en) 2003-12-02 2004-12-02 Compositions and methods for diagnosing and treating lung cancer
EP04812984A EP1692318A4 (en) 2003-12-02 2004-12-02 Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer
US11/445,061 US20070065889A1 (en) 2004-12-02 2006-06-01 Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US52652803P 2003-12-02 2003-12-02
US60/526,528 2003-12-02

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005055808A2 true WO2005055808A2 (en) 2005-06-23
WO2005055808A3 WO2005055808A3 (en) 2006-01-26

Family

ID=34676625

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/040576 WO2005055808A2 (en) 2003-12-02 2004-12-02 Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1692318A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2007518399A (en)
WO (1) WO2005055808A2 (en)

Cited By (183)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8648052B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2014-02-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Prevention of chlamydia infection using SIRNA
US8779104B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2014-07-15 The Regents Of The University Of California EMP2 antibodies and methods of use thereof causing regression of a solid tumor or symptoms thereof
WO2014153270A1 (en) 2013-03-16 2014-09-25 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using humanized anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
US9011857B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2015-04-21 The Regents Of The University Of California Methods of treating cancer by administering EMP2 antibodies
WO2015066413A1 (en) 2013-11-01 2015-05-07 Novartis Ag Oxazolidinone hydroxamic acid compounds for the treatment of bacterial infections
WO2015073644A1 (en) 2013-11-13 2015-05-21 Novartis Ag Mtor inhibitors for enhancing the immune response
WO2015090230A1 (en) 2013-12-19 2015-06-25 Novartis Ag Human mesothelin chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2015107495A1 (en) 2014-01-17 2015-07-23 Novartis Ag N-azaspirocycloalkane substituted n-heteroaryl compounds and compositions for inhibiting the activity of shp2
US9110064B2 (en) 2005-02-28 2015-08-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Methods for diagnosis and treatment of endometrial cancer
WO2015138920A1 (en) 2014-03-14 2015-09-17 Novartis Ag Antibody molecules to lag-3 and uses thereof
WO2015142675A2 (en) 2014-03-15 2015-09-24 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using chimeric antigen receptor
WO2015148379A1 (en) 2014-03-24 2015-10-01 Novartis Ag Monobactam organic compounds for the treatment of bacterial infections
WO2015157252A1 (en) 2014-04-07 2015-10-15 BROGDON, Jennifer Treatment of cancer using anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
WO2016014565A2 (en) 2014-07-21 2016-01-28 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using humanized anti-bcma chimeric antigen receptor
WO2016014530A1 (en) 2014-07-21 2016-01-28 Novartis Ag Combinations of low, immune enhancing. doses of mtor inhibitors and cars
WO2016014553A1 (en) 2014-07-21 2016-01-28 Novartis Ag Sortase synthesized chimeric antigen receptors
WO2016020836A1 (en) 2014-08-06 2016-02-11 Novartis Ag Quinolone derivatives as antibacterials
WO2016025880A1 (en) 2014-08-14 2016-02-18 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using gfr alpha-4 chimeric antigen receptor
WO2016040880A1 (en) 2014-09-13 2016-03-17 Novartis Ag Combination therapies of alk inhibitors
WO2016044605A1 (en) 2014-09-17 2016-03-24 Beatty, Gregory Targeting cytotoxic cells with chimeric receptors for adoptive immunotherapy
WO2016054555A2 (en) 2014-10-03 2016-04-07 Novartis Ag Combination therapies
WO2016057705A1 (en) 2014-10-08 2016-04-14 Novartis Ag Biomarkers predictive of therapeutic responsiveness to chimeric antigen receptor therapy and uses thereof
WO2016057841A1 (en) 2014-10-08 2016-04-14 Novartis Ag Compositions and methods of use for augmented immune response and cancer therapy
WO2016061142A1 (en) 2014-10-14 2016-04-21 Novartis Ag Antibody molecules to pd-l1 and uses thereof
WO2016090034A2 (en) 2014-12-03 2016-06-09 Novartis Ag Methods for b cell preconditioning in car therapy
WO2016097995A1 (en) 2014-12-16 2016-06-23 Novartis Ag Isoxazole hydroxamic acid compounds as lpxc inhibitors
WO2016100882A1 (en) 2014-12-19 2016-06-23 Novartis Ag Combination therapies
WO2016126608A1 (en) 2015-02-02 2016-08-11 Novartis Ag Car-expressing cells against multiple tumor antigens and uses thereof
WO2016145102A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2016-09-15 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Compositions and methods for activating "stimulator of interferon gene" -dependent signalling
US9464135B2 (en) 2007-10-08 2016-10-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Epithelial membrane protein-2 (EMP2) and proliferative vitroretinopathy (PVR)
WO2016164731A2 (en) 2015-04-08 2016-10-13 Novartis Ag Cd20 therapies, cd22 therapies, and combination therapies with a cd19 chimeric antigen receptor (car) - expressing cell
WO2016164580A1 (en) 2015-04-07 2016-10-13 Novartis Ag Combination of chimeric antigen receptor therapy and amino pyrimidine derivatives
WO2016168595A1 (en) 2015-04-17 2016-10-20 Barrett David Maxwell Methods for improving the efficacy and expansion of chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2016172583A1 (en) 2015-04-23 2016-10-27 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using chimeric antigen receptor and protein kinase a blocker
WO2017015427A1 (en) 2015-07-21 2017-01-26 Novartis Ag Methods for improving the efficacy and expansion of immune cells
WO2017019894A1 (en) 2015-07-29 2017-02-02 Novartis Ag Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to lag-3
WO2017019897A1 (en) 2015-07-29 2017-02-02 Novartis Ag Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to tim-3
WO2017040930A2 (en) 2015-09-03 2017-03-09 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Biomarkers predictive of cytokine release syndrome
WO2017079115A1 (en) 2015-11-03 2017-05-11 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Antibodies specifically binding tim-3 and their uses
WO2017103895A1 (en) 2015-12-18 2017-06-22 Novartis Ag Antibodies targeting cd32b and methods of use thereof
WO2017106656A1 (en) 2015-12-17 2017-06-22 Novartis Ag Antibody molecules to pd-1 and uses thereof
WO2017112741A1 (en) 2015-12-22 2017-06-29 Novartis Ag Mesothelin chimeric antigen receptor (car) and antibody against pd-l1 inhibitor for combined use in anticancer therapy
WO2017117112A1 (en) 2015-12-28 2017-07-06 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor -expressing cells
WO2017122130A1 (en) 2016-01-11 2017-07-20 Novartis Ag Immune-stimulating humanized monoclonal antibodies against human interleukin-2, and fusion proteins thereof
WO2017140821A1 (en) 2016-02-19 2017-08-24 Novartis Ag Tetracyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2017149515A1 (en) 2016-03-04 2017-09-08 Novartis Ag Cells expressing multiple chimeric antigen receptor (car) molecules and uses therefore
WO2017163186A1 (en) 2016-03-24 2017-09-28 Novartis Ag Alkynyl nucleoside analogs as inhibitors of human rhinovirus
WO2017180713A1 (en) 2016-04-13 2017-10-19 Orimabs Ltd. Anti-psma antibodies and use thereof
WO2017216686A1 (en) 2016-06-16 2017-12-21 Novartis Ag 8,9-fused 2-oxo-6,7-dihydropyrido-isoquinoline compounds as antivirals
WO2017216705A1 (en) 2016-06-14 2017-12-21 Novartis Ag Crystalline form of (r)-4-(5-(cyclopropylethynyl)isoxazol-3-yl)-n-hydroxy-2-methyl-2-(methylsulfonyl)butanamide as an antibacterial agent
WO2017216685A1 (en) 2016-06-16 2017-12-21 Novartis Ag Pentacyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2017223422A1 (en) 2016-06-24 2017-12-28 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combination therapies
WO2018047109A1 (en) 2016-09-09 2018-03-15 Novartis Ag Polycyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2018057585A1 (en) 2016-09-21 2018-03-29 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Chimeric antigen receptor (car) that targets chemokine receptor ccr4 and its use
WO2018060926A1 (en) 2016-09-28 2018-04-05 Novartis Ag Beta-lactamase inhibitors
WO2018067992A1 (en) 2016-10-07 2018-04-12 Novartis Ag Chimeric antigen receptors for the treatment of cancer
WO2018073753A1 (en) 2016-10-18 2018-04-26 Novartis Ag Fused tetracyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2018102787A1 (en) 2016-12-03 2018-06-07 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for determining car-t cells dosing
WO2018119183A2 (en) 2016-12-22 2018-06-28 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2018128939A1 (en) 2017-01-05 2018-07-12 Gensun Biopharma Inc. Checkpoint regulator antagonists
WO2018187227A1 (en) 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 Concologie, Inc. Methods for treating cancer using ps-targeting antibodies with immuno-oncology agents
WO2018198076A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Bis 2'-5'-rr-(3'f-a)(3'f-a) cyclic dinucleotide compound and uses thereof
WO2018198079A1 (en) 2017-04-27 2018-11-01 Novartis Ag Fused indazole pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2018201051A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Novartis Ag Bcma-targeting agent, and combination therapy with a gamma secretase inhibitor
WO2018201056A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Novartis Ag Cells expressing a bcma-targeting chimeric antigen receptor, and combination therapy with a gamma secretase inhibitor
WO2018203302A1 (en) 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Novartis Ag Tricyclic 2-quinolinones as antibacterials
WO2018217651A1 (en) 2017-05-22 2018-11-29 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2018223004A1 (en) 2017-06-01 2018-12-06 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind cd20 and cd3
WO2018223101A1 (en) 2017-06-02 2018-12-06 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Articles of manufacture and methods for treatment using adoptive cell therapy
WO2018223002A1 (en) 2017-06-01 2018-12-06 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind cd 123 cd3
WO2018226336A1 (en) 2017-06-09 2018-12-13 Providence Health & Services - Oregon Utilization of cd39 and cd103 for identification of human tumor reactive cells for treatment of cancer
WO2019006427A1 (en) 2017-06-29 2019-01-03 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Mouse model for assessing toxicities associated with immunotherapies
WO2019051291A1 (en) 2017-09-08 2019-03-14 Amgen Inc. Inhibitors of kras g12c and methods of using the same
WO2019084288A1 (en) 2017-10-25 2019-05-02 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2019089969A2 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Antibodies and chimeric antigen receptors specific for b-cell maturation antigen
WO2019090003A1 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for b-cell maturation antigen (bcma)
WO2019089858A2 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of assessing or monitoring a response to a cell therapy
WO2019097479A1 (en) 2017-11-17 2019-05-23 Novartis Ag Novel dihydroisoxazole compounds and their use for the treatment of hepatitis b
WO2019109053A1 (en) 2017-12-01 2019-06-06 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for dosing and for modulation of genetically engineered cells
WO2019118937A1 (en) 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-cct5 binding molecules and methods of use thereof
WO2019123285A1 (en) 2017-12-20 2019-06-27 Novartis Ag Fused tricyclic pyrazolo-dihydropyrazinyl-pyridone compounds as antivirals
EP3514179A1 (en) 2014-01-24 2019-07-24 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Antibody molecules to pd-1 and uses thereof
WO2019166951A1 (en) 2018-02-28 2019-09-06 Novartis Ag Indole-2-carbonyl compounds and their use for the treatment of hepatitis b
WO2019184909A1 (en) 2018-03-27 2019-10-03 信达生物制药(苏州)有限公司 Novel antibody molecule, and preparation method and use thereof
WO2019210153A1 (en) 2018-04-27 2019-10-31 Novartis Ag Car t cell therapies with enhanced efficacy
WO2019213526A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2019213516A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2019213282A1 (en) 2018-05-01 2019-11-07 Novartis Ag Biomarkers for evaluating car-t cells to predict clinical outcome
WO2019217691A1 (en) 2018-05-10 2019-11-14 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
WO2019227003A1 (en) 2018-05-25 2019-11-28 Novartis Ag Combination therapy with chimeric antigen receptor (car) therapies
WO2019232528A1 (en) 2018-06-01 2019-12-05 Xencor, Inc. Dosing of a bispecific antibody that bind cd123 and cd3
WO2019232419A1 (en) 2018-06-01 2019-12-05 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2019241426A1 (en) 2018-06-13 2019-12-19 Novartis Ag Bcma chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2019241157A1 (en) 2018-06-11 2019-12-19 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors for treating cancer
WO2020047452A2 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-03-05 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2020047449A2 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-03-05 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2020051333A1 (en) 2018-09-07 2020-03-12 Pfizer Inc. Anti-avb8 antibodies and compositions and uses thereof
WO2020050890A2 (en) 2018-06-12 2020-03-12 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2020053654A1 (en) 2018-09-12 2020-03-19 Novartis Ag Antiviral pyridopyrazinedione compounds
US10597453B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2020-03-24 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Antitumor immune checkpoint regulator antagonists
WO2020069409A1 (en) 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Novartis Ag Cd19 chimeric antigen receptor (car) and cd22 car combination therapies
WO2020065453A1 (en) 2018-09-29 2020-04-02 Novartis Ag Process of manufacture of a compound for inhibiting the activity of shp2
WO2020069405A1 (en) 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Novartis Ag Cd22 chimeric antigen receptor (car) therapies
WO2020092854A2 (en) 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for g protein-coupled receptor class c group 5 member d (gprc5d)
WO2020092848A2 (en) 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treatment using chimeric antigen receptors specific for b-cell maturation antigen
WO2020102770A1 (en) 2018-11-16 2020-05-22 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of dosing engineered t cells for the treatment of b cell malignancies
WO2020102730A1 (en) 2018-11-16 2020-05-22 Amgen Inc. Improved synthesis of key intermediate of kras g12c inhibitor compound
WO2020106647A2 (en) 2018-11-19 2020-05-28 Amgen Inc. Combination therapy including a krasg12c inhibitor and one or more additional pharmaceutically active agents for the treatment of cancers
WO2020106640A1 (en) 2018-11-19 2020-05-28 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
EP3660042A1 (en) 2014-07-31 2020-06-03 Novartis AG Subset-optimized chimeric antigen receptor-containing t-cells
WO2020113194A2 (en) 2018-11-30 2020-06-04 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treatment using adoptive cell therapy
WO2020132653A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Heteroaryl amides useful as kif18a inhibitors
WO2020132648A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2020132649A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Heteroaryl amides useful as kif18a inhibitors
WO2020132651A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2020160050A1 (en) 2019-01-29 2020-08-06 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Antibodies and chimeric antigen receptors specific for receptor tyrosine kinase like orphan receptor 1 (ror1)
WO2020180768A1 (en) 2019-03-01 2020-09-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Bicyclic heteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
WO2020180770A1 (en) 2019-03-01 2020-09-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Bicyclic heterocyclyl compounds and uses thereof
EP3712171A1 (en) 2014-08-19 2020-09-23 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using a cd123 chimeric antigen receptor
EP3722316A1 (en) 2014-07-21 2020-10-14 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using a cd33 chimeric antigen receptor
WO2020210678A1 (en) 2019-04-12 2020-10-15 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2020219742A1 (en) 2019-04-24 2020-10-29 Novartis Ag Compositions and methods for selective protein degradation
US10851157B2 (en) 2019-07-01 2020-12-01 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Antagonists targeting the TGF-β pathway
US10894823B2 (en) 2016-03-24 2021-01-19 Gensun Biopharma Inc. Trispecific inhibitors for cancer treatment
WO2021026099A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2021026098A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2021026100A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Pyridine derivatives as kif18a inhibitors
WO2021026101A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2021081212A1 (en) 2019-10-24 2021-04-29 Amgen Inc. Pyridopyrimidine derivatives useful as kras g12c and kras g12d inhibitors in the treatment of cancer
WO2021091982A1 (en) 2019-11-04 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2021091967A1 (en) 2019-11-04 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2021091956A1 (en) 2019-11-04 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2021092115A1 (en) 2019-11-08 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Bicyclic heteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
WO2021097207A1 (en) 2019-11-14 2021-05-20 Amgen Inc. Improved synthesis of kras g12c inhibitor compound
WO2021097212A1 (en) 2019-11-14 2021-05-20 Amgen Inc. Improved synthesis of kras g12c inhibitor compound
WO2021108683A1 (en) 2019-11-27 2021-06-03 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Covalent ras inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2021108613A1 (en) 2019-11-26 2021-06-03 Novartis Ag Cd19 and cd22 chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2021108661A2 (en) 2019-11-26 2021-06-03 Novartis Ag Chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2021142026A1 (en) 2020-01-07 2021-07-15 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Shp2 inhibitor dosing and methods of treating cancer
WO2021163618A1 (en) 2020-02-14 2021-08-19 Novartis Ag Method of predicting response to chimeric antigen receptor therapy
US11098077B2 (en) 2016-07-05 2021-08-24 Chinook Therapeutics, Inc. Locked nucleic acid cyclic dinucleotide compounds and uses thereof
WO2021173995A2 (en) 2020-02-27 2021-09-02 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2021171264A1 (en) 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 Novartis Ag Dosing of a bispecific antibody that binds cd123 and cd3
WO2021207689A2 (en) 2020-04-10 2021-10-14 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and uses related to cell therapy engineered with a chimeric antigen receptor targeting b-cell maturation antigen
WO2021257736A1 (en) 2020-06-18 2021-12-23 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Methods for delaying, preventing, and treating acquired resistance to ras inhibitors
US11236091B2 (en) 2019-05-21 2022-02-01 Amgen Inc. Solid state forms
WO2022060583A1 (en) 2020-09-03 2022-03-24 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Use of sos1 inhibitors to treat malignancies with shp2 mutations
WO2022060836A1 (en) 2020-09-15 2022-03-24 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Indole derivatives as ras inhibitors in the treatment of cancer
WO2022104061A1 (en) 2020-11-13 2022-05-19 Novartis Ag Combination therapies with chimeric antigen receptor (car)-expressing cells
WO2022125497A1 (en) 2020-12-08 2022-06-16 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Eganelisib for use in the treatment of pd-l1 negative cancer
US11365252B2 (en) 2016-07-20 2022-06-21 University Of Utah Research Foundation CD229 CAR T cells and methods of use thereof
WO2022140427A1 (en) 2020-12-22 2022-06-30 Qilu Regor Therapeutics Inc. Sos1 inhibitors and uses thereof
EP4036109A2 (en) 2014-12-29 2022-08-03 Novartis AG Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
US11426404B2 (en) 2019-05-14 2022-08-30 Amgen Inc. Dosing of KRAS inhibitor for treatment of cancers
WO2022235864A1 (en) 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2022235870A1 (en) 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
WO2022235866A1 (en) 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Covalent ras inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2022254337A1 (en) 2021-06-01 2022-12-08 Novartis Ag Cd19 and cd22 chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2022261018A1 (en) 2021-06-07 2022-12-15 Providence Health & Services - Oregon Cxcr5, pd-1, and icos expressing tumor reactive cd4 t cells and their use
WO2023039089A1 (en) 2021-09-08 2023-03-16 Twentyeight-Seven, Inc. Papd5 and/or papd7 inhibiting 4-oxo-1,4-dihydroquinoline-3-carboxylic acid derivatives
WO2023060253A1 (en) 2021-10-08 2023-04-13 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
US11667613B2 (en) 2019-09-26 2023-06-06 Novartis Ag Antiviral pyrazolopyridinone compounds
WO2023114954A1 (en) 2021-12-17 2023-06-22 Genzyme Corporation Pyrazolopyrazine compounds as shp2 inhibitors
EP4227307A1 (en) 2022-02-11 2023-08-16 Genzyme Corporation Pyrazolopyrazine compounds as shp2 inhibitors
WO2023154905A1 (en) 2022-02-14 2023-08-17 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral pyrazolopyridinone compounds
US11746148B2 (en) 2018-03-27 2023-09-05 Innovent Biologics (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Antibody molecules comprising a single-domain antigen-binding site and Fab fragments
WO2023172940A1 (en) 2022-03-08 2023-09-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Methods for treating immune refractory lung cancer
WO2023240263A1 (en) 2022-06-10 2023-12-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Macrocyclic ras inhibitors
WO2023250400A1 (en) 2022-06-22 2023-12-28 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Treatment methods for second line therapy of cd19-targeted car t cells
WO2024031091A2 (en) 2022-08-05 2024-02-08 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for gprc5d and bcma
EP4324518A2 (en) 2014-01-31 2024-02-21 Novartis AG Antibody molecules to tim-3 and uses thereof
WO2024081916A1 (en) 2022-10-14 2024-04-18 Black Diamond Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating cancers using isoquinoline or 6-aza-quinoline derivatives
EP4378957A2 (en) 2015-07-29 2024-06-05 Novartis AG Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to pd-1
WO2024129778A2 (en) 2022-12-13 2024-06-20 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for baff-r and cd19 and methods and uses thereof
WO2024206858A1 (en) 2023-03-30 2024-10-03 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Compositions for inducing ras gtp hydrolysis and uses thereof
WO2024211663A1 (en) 2023-04-07 2024-10-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Condensed macrocyclic compounds as ras inhibitors
WO2024211712A1 (en) 2023-04-07 2024-10-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Condensed macrocyclic compounds as ras inhibitors
WO2024216016A1 (en) 2023-04-14 2024-10-17 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Crystalline forms of a ras inhibitor
WO2024216048A1 (en) 2023-04-14 2024-10-17 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Crystalline forms of ras inhibitors, compositions containing the same, and methods of use thereof
WO2024229406A1 (en) 2023-05-04 2024-11-07 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Combination therapy for a ras related disease or disorder
WO2025034702A1 (en) 2023-08-07 2025-02-13 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Rmc-6291 for use in the treatment of ras protein-related disease or disorder
WO2025080946A2 (en) 2023-10-12 2025-04-17 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2025137507A1 (en) 2023-12-22 2025-06-26 Regor Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sos1 inhibitors and uses thereof

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ATE419357T1 (en) * 1997-11-18 2009-01-15 Genentech Inc DNA 19355 POLYPEPTIDES, A HOMOLOGUE OF TUMOR NECROSIS FACTOR
JP2002531092A (en) * 1998-12-01 2002-09-24 ジェネンテック・インコーポレーテッド Compositions and methods for inhibiting neoplastic cell growth
US6858204B2 (en) * 1999-06-30 2005-02-22 Corxia Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of lung cancer
ES2295040T3 (en) * 1999-07-12 2008-04-16 Genentech, Inc. PROMOTION OR INHIBITION OF ANGIOGENESIS AND CARDIOVASCULARIZATION BY LEGEND / RECEIVER OF TUMOR NECROSIS FACTOR.
WO2004073657A2 (en) * 2003-02-19 2004-09-02 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Methods of diagnosis of cancer and other diseases, composition and methods of screening for modulators of cancer and other diseases

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See references of EP1692318A4 *

Cited By (270)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9110064B2 (en) 2005-02-28 2015-08-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Methods for diagnosis and treatment of endometrial cancer
US8779104B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2014-07-15 The Regents Of The University Of California EMP2 antibodies and methods of use thereof causing regression of a solid tumor or symptoms thereof
US8785602B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2014-07-22 The Regents Of The University Of California EMP2 antibodies and methods of use thereof for causing regression of a solid tumor or symptoms thereof
US9624304B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2017-04-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Antibodies which bind to epithelial membrane protein 2 (EMP2)
US9011857B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2015-04-21 The Regents Of The University Of California Methods of treating cancer by administering EMP2 antibodies
US8648052B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2014-02-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Prevention of chlamydia infection using SIRNA
US9464135B2 (en) 2007-10-08 2016-10-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Epithelial membrane protein-2 (EMP2) and proliferative vitroretinopathy (PVR)
EP3539986A1 (en) 2013-03-16 2019-09-18 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using humanized anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
WO2014153270A1 (en) 2013-03-16 2014-09-25 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using humanized anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
EP4067382A1 (en) 2013-03-16 2022-10-05 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using humanized anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
WO2015066413A1 (en) 2013-11-01 2015-05-07 Novartis Ag Oxazolidinone hydroxamic acid compounds for the treatment of bacterial infections
WO2015073644A1 (en) 2013-11-13 2015-05-21 Novartis Ag Mtor inhibitors for enhancing the immune response
WO2015090230A1 (en) 2013-12-19 2015-06-25 Novartis Ag Human mesothelin chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
EP4026909A1 (en) 2013-12-19 2022-07-13 Novartis AG Human mesothelin chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2015107495A1 (en) 2014-01-17 2015-07-23 Novartis Ag N-azaspirocycloalkane substituted n-heteroaryl compounds and compositions for inhibiting the activity of shp2
EP3514179A1 (en) 2014-01-24 2019-07-24 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Antibody molecules to pd-1 and uses thereof
EP4324518A2 (en) 2014-01-31 2024-02-21 Novartis AG Antibody molecules to tim-3 and uses thereof
WO2015138920A1 (en) 2014-03-14 2015-09-17 Novartis Ag Antibody molecules to lag-3 and uses thereof
EP3660050A1 (en) 2014-03-14 2020-06-03 Novartis AG Antibody molecules to lag-3 and uses thereof
WO2015142675A2 (en) 2014-03-15 2015-09-24 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using chimeric antigen receptor
EP3511328A1 (en) 2014-03-24 2019-07-17 Novartis AG Monobactam organic compounds for the treatment of bacterial infections
WO2015148379A1 (en) 2014-03-24 2015-10-01 Novartis Ag Monobactam organic compounds for the treatment of bacterial infections
WO2015157252A1 (en) 2014-04-07 2015-10-15 BROGDON, Jennifer Treatment of cancer using anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
EP4406610A2 (en) 2014-04-07 2024-07-31 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
EP3888674A1 (en) 2014-04-07 2021-10-06 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using anti-cd19 chimeric antigen receptor
EP3722316A1 (en) 2014-07-21 2020-10-14 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using a cd33 chimeric antigen receptor
WO2016014565A2 (en) 2014-07-21 2016-01-28 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using humanized anti-bcma chimeric antigen receptor
WO2016014530A1 (en) 2014-07-21 2016-01-28 Novartis Ag Combinations of low, immune enhancing. doses of mtor inhibitors and cars
WO2016014553A1 (en) 2014-07-21 2016-01-28 Novartis Ag Sortase synthesized chimeric antigen receptors
EP3660042A1 (en) 2014-07-31 2020-06-03 Novartis AG Subset-optimized chimeric antigen receptor-containing t-cells
EP4205749A1 (en) 2014-07-31 2023-07-05 Novartis AG Subset-optimized chimeric antigen receptor-containing cells
WO2016020836A1 (en) 2014-08-06 2016-02-11 Novartis Ag Quinolone derivatives as antibacterials
WO2016025880A1 (en) 2014-08-14 2016-02-18 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using gfr alpha-4 chimeric antigen receptor
EP3712171A1 (en) 2014-08-19 2020-09-23 Novartis AG Treatment of cancer using a cd123 chimeric antigen receptor
WO2016040892A1 (en) 2014-09-13 2016-03-17 Novartis Ag Combination therapies
EP3659621A1 (en) 2014-09-13 2020-06-03 Novartis AG Combination therapies for cancer
WO2016040880A1 (en) 2014-09-13 2016-03-17 Novartis Ag Combination therapies of alk inhibitors
EP3925622A1 (en) 2014-09-13 2021-12-22 Novartis AG Combination therapies
WO2016044605A1 (en) 2014-09-17 2016-03-24 Beatty, Gregory Targeting cytotoxic cells with chimeric receptors for adoptive immunotherapy
EP3967709A1 (en) 2014-09-17 2022-03-16 Novartis AG Targeting cytotoxic cells with chimeric receptors for adoptive immunotherapy
EP3662903A2 (en) 2014-10-03 2020-06-10 Novartis AG Combination therapies
WO2016054555A2 (en) 2014-10-03 2016-04-07 Novartis Ag Combination therapies
WO2016057705A1 (en) 2014-10-08 2016-04-14 Novartis Ag Biomarkers predictive of therapeutic responsiveness to chimeric antigen receptor therapy and uses thereof
WO2016057841A1 (en) 2014-10-08 2016-04-14 Novartis Ag Compositions and methods of use for augmented immune response and cancer therapy
WO2016061142A1 (en) 2014-10-14 2016-04-21 Novartis Ag Antibody molecules to pd-l1 and uses thereof
EP4245376A2 (en) 2014-10-14 2023-09-20 Novartis AG Antibody molecules to pd-l1 and uses thereof
WO2016090034A2 (en) 2014-12-03 2016-06-09 Novartis Ag Methods for b cell preconditioning in car therapy
WO2016097995A1 (en) 2014-12-16 2016-06-23 Novartis Ag Isoxazole hydroxamic acid compounds as lpxc inhibitors
WO2016100882A1 (en) 2014-12-19 2016-06-23 Novartis Ag Combination therapies
EP4036109A2 (en) 2014-12-29 2022-08-03 Novartis AG Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2016126608A1 (en) 2015-02-02 2016-08-11 Novartis Ag Car-expressing cells against multiple tumor antigens and uses thereof
US11040053B2 (en) 2015-03-10 2021-06-22 Chinook Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for activating “stimulator of interferon gene”13 dependent signalling
WO2016145102A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2016-09-15 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Compositions and methods for activating "stimulator of interferon gene" -dependent signalling
US10449211B2 (en) 2015-03-10 2019-10-22 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Compositions and methods for activating “stimulator of interferon gene”—dependent signalling
WO2016164580A1 (en) 2015-04-07 2016-10-13 Novartis Ag Combination of chimeric antigen receptor therapy and amino pyrimidine derivatives
EP4056588A1 (en) 2015-04-08 2022-09-14 Novartis AG Cd20 therapies, cd22 therapies, and combination therapies with a cd19 chimeric antigen receptor (car)- expressing cell
WO2016164731A2 (en) 2015-04-08 2016-10-13 Novartis Ag Cd20 therapies, cd22 therapies, and combination therapies with a cd19 chimeric antigen receptor (car) - expressing cell
EP4491715A2 (en) 2015-04-08 2025-01-15 Novartis AG Cd20 therapies, cd22 therapies, and combination therapies with a cd19 chimeric antigen receptor (car)- expressing cell
WO2016168595A1 (en) 2015-04-17 2016-10-20 Barrett David Maxwell Methods for improving the efficacy and expansion of chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
EP4234685A2 (en) 2015-04-17 2023-08-30 Novartis AG Methods for improving the efficacy and expansion of chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2016172583A1 (en) 2015-04-23 2016-10-27 Novartis Ag Treatment of cancer using chimeric antigen receptor and protein kinase a blocker
WO2017015427A1 (en) 2015-07-21 2017-01-26 Novartis Ag Methods for improving the efficacy and expansion of immune cells
EP4378957A2 (en) 2015-07-29 2024-06-05 Novartis AG Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to pd-1
EP3964528A1 (en) 2015-07-29 2022-03-09 Novartis AG Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to lag-3
EP3878465A1 (en) 2015-07-29 2021-09-15 Novartis AG Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to tim-3
WO2017019894A1 (en) 2015-07-29 2017-02-02 Novartis Ag Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to lag-3
WO2017019897A1 (en) 2015-07-29 2017-02-02 Novartis Ag Combination therapies comprising antibody molecules to tim-3
WO2017040930A2 (en) 2015-09-03 2017-03-09 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Biomarkers predictive of cytokine release syndrome
WO2017079112A1 (en) 2015-11-03 2017-05-11 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Antibodies specifically binding pd-1 and their uses
EP4046655A1 (en) 2015-11-03 2022-08-24 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Antibodies specifically binding pd-1 and their uses
WO2017079115A1 (en) 2015-11-03 2017-05-11 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Antibodies specifically binding tim-3 and their uses
WO2017079116A2 (en) 2015-11-03 2017-05-11 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Antibodies specifically binding pd-1 and tim-3 and their uses
EP4424322A2 (en) 2015-12-17 2024-09-04 Novartis AG Antibody molecules to pd-1 and uses thereof
WO2017106656A1 (en) 2015-12-17 2017-06-22 Novartis Ag Antibody molecules to pd-1 and uses thereof
WO2017103895A1 (en) 2015-12-18 2017-06-22 Novartis Ag Antibodies targeting cd32b and methods of use thereof
WO2017112741A1 (en) 2015-12-22 2017-06-29 Novartis Ag Mesothelin chimeric antigen receptor (car) and antibody against pd-l1 inhibitor for combined use in anticancer therapy
EP4477748A2 (en) 2015-12-28 2024-12-18 Novartis AG Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2017117112A1 (en) 2015-12-28 2017-07-06 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor -expressing cells
WO2017122130A1 (en) 2016-01-11 2017-07-20 Novartis Ag Immune-stimulating humanized monoclonal antibodies against human interleukin-2, and fusion proteins thereof
WO2017140821A1 (en) 2016-02-19 2017-08-24 Novartis Ag Tetracyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2017149515A1 (en) 2016-03-04 2017-09-08 Novartis Ag Cells expressing multiple chimeric antigen receptor (car) molecules and uses therefore
EP4292658A2 (en) 2016-03-24 2023-12-20 Novartis AG Alkynyl nucleoside analogs as inhibitors of human rhinovirus
WO2017163186A1 (en) 2016-03-24 2017-09-28 Novartis Ag Alkynyl nucleoside analogs as inhibitors of human rhinovirus
US10894823B2 (en) 2016-03-24 2021-01-19 Gensun Biopharma Inc. Trispecific inhibitors for cancer treatment
WO2017180713A1 (en) 2016-04-13 2017-10-19 Orimabs Ltd. Anti-psma antibodies and use thereof
US10071973B2 (en) 2016-06-14 2018-09-11 Novartis Ag Crystalline isoxazole hydroxamic acid compounds
WO2017216705A1 (en) 2016-06-14 2017-12-21 Novartis Ag Crystalline form of (r)-4-(5-(cyclopropylethynyl)isoxazol-3-yl)-n-hydroxy-2-methyl-2-(methylsulfonyl)butanamide as an antibacterial agent
WO2017216685A1 (en) 2016-06-16 2017-12-21 Novartis Ag Pentacyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2017216686A1 (en) 2016-06-16 2017-12-21 Novartis Ag 8,9-fused 2-oxo-6,7-dihydropyrido-isoquinoline compounds as antivirals
WO2017223422A1 (en) 2016-06-24 2017-12-28 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combination therapies
US11098077B2 (en) 2016-07-05 2021-08-24 Chinook Therapeutics, Inc. Locked nucleic acid cyclic dinucleotide compounds and uses thereof
US11365252B2 (en) 2016-07-20 2022-06-21 University Of Utah Research Foundation CD229 CAR T cells and methods of use thereof
WO2018047109A1 (en) 2016-09-09 2018-03-15 Novartis Ag Polycyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2018057585A1 (en) 2016-09-21 2018-03-29 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Chimeric antigen receptor (car) that targets chemokine receptor ccr4 and its use
EP3698796A1 (en) 2016-09-28 2020-08-26 Novartis AG Pharmaceutical combination of a tricyclic beta-lactamase inhibitor with specific beta-lactam antibiotics
WO2018060926A1 (en) 2016-09-28 2018-04-05 Novartis Ag Beta-lactamase inhibitors
WO2018067992A1 (en) 2016-10-07 2018-04-12 Novartis Ag Chimeric antigen receptors for the treatment of cancer
WO2018073753A1 (en) 2016-10-18 2018-04-26 Novartis Ag Fused tetracyclic pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2018102787A1 (en) 2016-12-03 2018-06-07 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for determining car-t cells dosing
EP4279136A2 (en) 2016-12-03 2023-11-22 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for determining car-t cells dosing
US10532042B2 (en) 2016-12-22 2020-01-14 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2018119183A2 (en) 2016-12-22 2018-06-28 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11285135B2 (en) 2016-12-22 2022-03-29 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
EP4001269A1 (en) 2016-12-22 2022-05-25 Amgen Inc. Benzoisothiazole, isothiazolo[3,4-b]pyridine, quinazoline, phthalazine, pyrido[2,3-d]pyridazine and pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidine derivatives as kras g12c inhibitors for treating lung, pancreatic or colorectal cancer
WO2018128939A1 (en) 2017-01-05 2018-07-12 Gensun Biopharma Inc. Checkpoint regulator antagonists
US11517623B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2022-12-06 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Anti-PD-1 antibodies, antigen-binding portions thereof and checkpoint regulator antogonists comprising the same
US10537637B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2020-01-21 Gensun Biopharma Inc. Checkpoint regulator antagonists
US11571459B2 (en) 2017-04-03 2023-02-07 Oncxerna Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating cancer using PS-targeting antibodies with immuno-oncology agents
WO2018187227A1 (en) 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 Concologie, Inc. Methods for treating cancer using ps-targeting antibodies with immuno-oncology agents
US10301312B2 (en) 2017-04-27 2019-05-28 Novartis Ag Fused indazole pyridone compounds as antivirals
US10975078B2 (en) 2017-04-27 2021-04-13 Novartis Ag Fused indazole pyridone compounds as antivirals
EP3998269A1 (en) 2017-04-27 2022-05-18 Novartis AG Fused indazole pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2018198079A1 (en) 2017-04-27 2018-11-01 Novartis Ag Fused indazole pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2018201051A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Novartis Ag Bcma-targeting agent, and combination therapy with a gamma secretase inhibitor
US10975114B2 (en) 2017-04-28 2021-04-13 Chinook Therapeutics, Inc. Bis 2′-5′-RR-(3′F-A)(3′F-A) cyclic dinucleotide compound and uses thereof
WO2018201056A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Novartis Ag Cells expressing a bcma-targeting chimeric antigen receptor, and combination therapy with a gamma secretase inhibitor
WO2018198076A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 Aduro Biotech, Inc. Bis 2'-5'-rr-(3'f-a)(3'f-a) cyclic dinucleotide compound and uses thereof
WO2018203302A1 (en) 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Novartis Ag Tricyclic 2-quinolinones as antibacterials
US11905281B2 (en) 2017-05-22 2024-02-20 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
US10519146B2 (en) 2017-05-22 2019-12-31 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
EP3974429A1 (en) 2017-05-22 2022-03-30 Amgen Inc. Precursors of kras g12c inhibitors
WO2018217651A1 (en) 2017-05-22 2018-11-29 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2018223002A1 (en) 2017-06-01 2018-12-06 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind cd 123 cd3
WO2018223004A1 (en) 2017-06-01 2018-12-06 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind cd20 and cd3
US11944647B2 (en) 2017-06-02 2024-04-02 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Articles of manufacture and methods for treatment using adoptive cell therapy
US11413310B2 (en) 2017-06-02 2022-08-16 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Articles of manufacture and methods for treatment using adoptive cell therapy
WO2018223101A1 (en) 2017-06-02 2018-12-06 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Articles of manufacture and methods for treatment using adoptive cell therapy
EP4461825A2 (en) 2017-06-09 2024-11-13 Providence Health & Services - Oregon Tumor-infiltrating t-cells for use in the treatment of cancer
WO2018226336A1 (en) 2017-06-09 2018-12-13 Providence Health & Services - Oregon Utilization of cd39 and cd103 for identification of human tumor reactive cells for treatment of cancer
WO2019006427A1 (en) 2017-06-29 2019-01-03 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Mouse model for assessing toxicities associated with immunotherapies
US11306087B2 (en) 2017-09-08 2022-04-19 Amgen Inc. Inhibitors of KRAS G12C and methods of using the same
US10640504B2 (en) 2017-09-08 2020-05-05 Amgen Inc. Inhibitors of KRAS G12C and methods of using the same
EP4141005A1 (en) 2017-09-08 2023-03-01 Amgen Inc. Inhibitors of kras g12c and methods of using the same
EP4403175A2 (en) 2017-09-08 2024-07-24 Amgen Inc. Inhibitors of kras g12c and methods of using the same
WO2019051291A1 (en) 2017-09-08 2019-03-14 Amgen Inc. Inhibitors of kras g12c and methods of using the same
US11993597B2 (en) 2017-09-08 2024-05-28 Amgen Inc. Inhibitors of KRAS G12C and methods of using the same
WO2019084288A1 (en) 2017-10-25 2019-05-02 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2019089858A2 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of assessing or monitoring a response to a cell therapy
US11623961B2 (en) 2017-11-01 2023-04-11 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Antibodies and chimeric antigen receptors specific for B-cell maturation antigen
WO2019089969A2 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Antibodies and chimeric antigen receptors specific for b-cell maturation antigen
US12031975B2 (en) 2017-11-01 2024-07-09 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of assessing or monitoring a response to a cell therapy
WO2019090003A1 (en) 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for b-cell maturation antigen (bcma)
US11066475B2 (en) 2017-11-01 2021-07-20 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for B-cell maturation antigen and encoding polynucleotides
WO2019097479A1 (en) 2017-11-17 2019-05-23 Novartis Ag Novel dihydroisoxazole compounds and their use for the treatment of hepatitis b
WO2019109053A1 (en) 2017-12-01 2019-06-06 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for dosing and for modulation of genetically engineered cells
WO2019118937A1 (en) 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-cct5 binding molecules and methods of use thereof
US12006356B2 (en) 2017-12-15 2024-06-11 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-CCT5 binding molecules and chimeric antigen receptors comprising the same
US11234977B2 (en) 2017-12-20 2022-02-01 Novartis Ag Fused tricyclic pyrazolo-dihydropyrazinyl-pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2019123285A1 (en) 2017-12-20 2019-06-27 Novartis Ag Fused tricyclic pyrazolo-dihydropyrazinyl-pyridone compounds as antivirals
WO2019166951A1 (en) 2018-02-28 2019-09-06 Novartis Ag Indole-2-carbonyl compounds and their use for the treatment of hepatitis b
WO2019184909A1 (en) 2018-03-27 2019-10-03 信达生物制药(苏州)有限公司 Novel antibody molecule, and preparation method and use thereof
US11746148B2 (en) 2018-03-27 2023-09-05 Innovent Biologics (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Antibody molecules comprising a single-domain antigen-binding site and Fab fragments
WO2019210153A1 (en) 2018-04-27 2019-10-31 Novartis Ag Car t cell therapies with enhanced efficacy
WO2019213282A1 (en) 2018-05-01 2019-11-07 Novartis Ag Biomarkers for evaluating car-t cells to predict clinical outcome
WO2019213526A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11766436B2 (en) 2018-05-04 2023-09-26 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11090304B2 (en) 2018-05-04 2021-08-17 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11045484B2 (en) 2018-05-04 2021-06-29 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2019213516A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2019217691A1 (en) 2018-05-10 2019-11-14 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
US10988485B2 (en) 2018-05-10 2021-04-27 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2019227003A1 (en) 2018-05-25 2019-11-28 Novartis Ag Combination therapy with chimeric antigen receptor (car) therapies
WO2019232419A1 (en) 2018-06-01 2019-12-05 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11096939B2 (en) 2018-06-01 2021-08-24 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2019232528A1 (en) 2018-06-01 2019-12-05 Xencor, Inc. Dosing of a bispecific antibody that bind cd123 and cd3
EP4268898A2 (en) 2018-06-11 2023-11-01 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors for treating cancer
WO2019241157A1 (en) 2018-06-11 2019-12-19 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors for treating cancer
WO2020050890A2 (en) 2018-06-12 2020-03-12 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
US12083121B2 (en) 2018-06-12 2024-09-10 Amgen Inc. Substituted piperazines as KRAS G12C inhibitors
US11285156B2 (en) 2018-06-12 2022-03-29 Amgen Inc. Substituted piperazines as KRAS G12C inhibitors
WO2019241426A1 (en) 2018-06-13 2019-12-19 Novartis Ag Bcma chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
US11667716B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2023-06-06 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Bispecific antagonist comprising a LAG-3 binding domain
US10647773B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2020-05-12 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Trispecific antagonists
US11001635B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2021-05-11 Gensun Biopharma Inc. Antitumor antagonists
US11945873B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2024-04-02 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Antitumor antagonists
US10597453B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2020-03-24 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Antitumor immune checkpoint regulator antagonists
US11518813B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2022-12-06 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Trispecific antagonists
WO2020047452A2 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-03-05 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2020047449A2 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-03-05 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2020051333A1 (en) 2018-09-07 2020-03-12 Pfizer Inc. Anti-avb8 antibodies and compositions and uses thereof
US11072610B2 (en) 2018-09-12 2021-07-27 Novartis Ag Antiviral pyridopyrazinedione compounds
WO2020053654A1 (en) 2018-09-12 2020-03-19 Novartis Ag Antiviral pyridopyrazinedione compounds
WO2020069405A1 (en) 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Novartis Ag Cd22 chimeric antigen receptor (car) therapies
WO2020069409A1 (en) 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Novartis Ag Cd19 chimeric antigen receptor (car) and cd22 car combination therapies
EP4282416A2 (en) 2018-09-29 2023-11-29 Novartis AG Process of manufacture of a compound for inhibiting the activity of shp2
WO2020065453A1 (en) 2018-09-29 2020-04-02 Novartis Ag Process of manufacture of a compound for inhibiting the activity of shp2
WO2020092848A2 (en) 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treatment using chimeric antigen receptors specific for b-cell maturation antigen
WO2020092854A2 (en) 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for g protein-coupled receptor class c group 5 member d (gprc5d)
WO2020102770A1 (en) 2018-11-16 2020-05-22 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of dosing engineered t cells for the treatment of b cell malignancies
WO2020102730A1 (en) 2018-11-16 2020-05-22 Amgen Inc. Improved synthesis of key intermediate of kras g12c inhibitor compound
US11299491B2 (en) 2018-11-16 2022-04-12 Amgen Inc. Synthesis of key intermediate of KRAS G12C inhibitor compound
EP4234546A2 (en) 2018-11-16 2023-08-30 Amgen Inc. Improved synthesis of key intermediate of kras g12c inhibitor compound
US11439645B2 (en) 2018-11-19 2022-09-13 Amgen Inc. Combination therapy including a KRASG12C inhibitor and one or more additional pharmaceutically active agents for the treatment of cancers
US12280056B2 (en) 2018-11-19 2025-04-22 Amgen Inc. Combination therapy including a KRASG12C inhibitor and one or more additional pharmaceutically active agents for the treatment of cancers
US11918584B2 (en) 2018-11-19 2024-03-05 Amgen Inc. Combination therapy including a KRASG12C inhibitor and one or more additional pharmaceutically active agents for the treatment of cancers
WO2020106647A2 (en) 2018-11-19 2020-05-28 Amgen Inc. Combination therapy including a krasg12c inhibitor and one or more additional pharmaceutically active agents for the treatment of cancers
WO2020106640A1 (en) 2018-11-19 2020-05-28 Amgen Inc. Kras g12c inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11053226B2 (en) 2018-11-19 2021-07-06 Amgen Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2020113194A2 (en) 2018-11-30 2020-06-04 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treatment using adoptive cell therapy
EP4427810A2 (en) 2018-11-30 2024-09-11 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treatment using adoptive cell therapy
US12054476B2 (en) 2018-12-20 2024-08-06 Amgen Inc. KIF18A inhibitors
US11236069B2 (en) 2018-12-20 2022-02-01 Amgen Inc. KIF18A inhibitors
WO2020132653A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Heteroaryl amides useful as kif18a inhibitors
WO2020132648A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2020132649A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Heteroaryl amides useful as kif18a inhibitors
WO2020132651A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2020160050A1 (en) 2019-01-29 2020-08-06 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Antibodies and chimeric antigen receptors specific for receptor tyrosine kinase like orphan receptor 1 (ror1)
US12268741B2 (en) 2019-01-29 2025-04-08 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Antibodies and chimeric antigen receptors specific for receptor tyrosine kinase like orphan receptor 1 (ROR1)
WO2020180768A1 (en) 2019-03-01 2020-09-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Bicyclic heteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
WO2020180770A1 (en) 2019-03-01 2020-09-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Bicyclic heterocyclyl compounds and uses thereof
WO2020210678A1 (en) 2019-04-12 2020-10-15 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2020219742A1 (en) 2019-04-24 2020-10-29 Novartis Ag Compositions and methods for selective protein degradation
US11426404B2 (en) 2019-05-14 2022-08-30 Amgen Inc. Dosing of KRAS inhibitor for treatment of cancers
US11827635B2 (en) 2019-05-21 2023-11-28 Amgen Inc. Solid state forms
US11236091B2 (en) 2019-05-21 2022-02-01 Amgen Inc. Solid state forms
WO2020263312A1 (en) 2019-06-28 2020-12-30 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. ANTITUMOR ANTAGONIST CONSISTING OF A MUTATED TGFβ1 - RII EXTRACELLULAR DOMAIN AND AN IMMUNOGLOBULIN SCAFFOLD
US10851157B2 (en) 2019-07-01 2020-12-01 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Antagonists targeting the TGF-β pathway
US12018073B2 (en) 2019-07-01 2024-06-25 Gensun Biopharma, Inc. Antagonists targeting the TGF-β pathway
WO2021026101A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2021026099A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2021026098A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Kif18a inhibitors
WO2021026100A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2021-02-11 Amgen Inc. Pyridine derivatives as kif18a inhibitors
US11667613B2 (en) 2019-09-26 2023-06-06 Novartis Ag Antiviral pyrazolopyridinone compounds
US12338220B2 (en) 2019-09-26 2025-06-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral pyrazolopiridinone compounds
WO2021081212A1 (en) 2019-10-24 2021-04-29 Amgen Inc. Pyridopyrimidine derivatives useful as kras g12c and kras g12d inhibitors in the treatment of cancer
WO2021091967A1 (en) 2019-11-04 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2021091982A1 (en) 2019-11-04 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2021091956A1 (en) 2019-11-04 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2021092115A1 (en) 2019-11-08 2021-05-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Bicyclic heteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
WO2021097212A1 (en) 2019-11-14 2021-05-20 Amgen Inc. Improved synthesis of kras g12c inhibitor compound
WO2021097207A1 (en) 2019-11-14 2021-05-20 Amgen Inc. Improved synthesis of kras g12c inhibitor compound
WO2021108613A1 (en) 2019-11-26 2021-06-03 Novartis Ag Cd19 and cd22 chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2021108661A2 (en) 2019-11-26 2021-06-03 Novartis Ag Chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2021108683A1 (en) 2019-11-27 2021-06-03 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Covalent ras inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2021142026A1 (en) 2020-01-07 2021-07-15 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Shp2 inhibitor dosing and methods of treating cancer
WO2021163618A1 (en) 2020-02-14 2021-08-19 Novartis Ag Method of predicting response to chimeric antigen receptor therapy
WO2021173995A2 (en) 2020-02-27 2021-09-02 Novartis Ag Methods of making chimeric antigen receptor-expressing cells
WO2021171264A1 (en) 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 Novartis Ag Dosing of a bispecific antibody that binds cd123 and cd3
WO2021207689A2 (en) 2020-04-10 2021-10-14 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and uses related to cell therapy engineered with a chimeric antigen receptor targeting b-cell maturation antigen
WO2021257736A1 (en) 2020-06-18 2021-12-23 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Methods for delaying, preventing, and treating acquired resistance to ras inhibitors
WO2022060583A1 (en) 2020-09-03 2022-03-24 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Use of sos1 inhibitors to treat malignancies with shp2 mutations
WO2022060836A1 (en) 2020-09-15 2022-03-24 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Indole derivatives as ras inhibitors in the treatment of cancer
WO2022104061A1 (en) 2020-11-13 2022-05-19 Novartis Ag Combination therapies with chimeric antigen receptor (car)-expressing cells
WO2022125497A1 (en) 2020-12-08 2022-06-16 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Eganelisib for use in the treatment of pd-l1 negative cancer
WO2022140427A1 (en) 2020-12-22 2022-06-30 Qilu Regor Therapeutics Inc. Sos1 inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2022235864A1 (en) 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2022235870A1 (en) 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
WO2022235866A1 (en) 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Covalent ras inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2022254337A1 (en) 2021-06-01 2022-12-08 Novartis Ag Cd19 and cd22 chimeric antigen receptors and uses thereof
WO2022261018A1 (en) 2021-06-07 2022-12-15 Providence Health & Services - Oregon Cxcr5, pd-1, and icos expressing tumor reactive cd4 t cells and their use
WO2023039089A1 (en) 2021-09-08 2023-03-16 Twentyeight-Seven, Inc. Papd5 and/or papd7 inhibiting 4-oxo-1,4-dihydroquinoline-3-carboxylic acid derivatives
WO2023060253A1 (en) 2021-10-08 2023-04-13 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2023114954A1 (en) 2021-12-17 2023-06-22 Genzyme Corporation Pyrazolopyrazine compounds as shp2 inhibitors
EP4227307A1 (en) 2022-02-11 2023-08-16 Genzyme Corporation Pyrazolopyrazine compounds as shp2 inhibitors
WO2023154905A1 (en) 2022-02-14 2023-08-17 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral pyrazolopyridinone compounds
WO2023172940A1 (en) 2022-03-08 2023-09-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Methods for treating immune refractory lung cancer
WO2023240263A1 (en) 2022-06-10 2023-12-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Macrocyclic ras inhibitors
WO2023250400A1 (en) 2022-06-22 2023-12-28 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Treatment methods for second line therapy of cd19-targeted car t cells
WO2024031091A2 (en) 2022-08-05 2024-02-08 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for gprc5d and bcma
WO2024081916A1 (en) 2022-10-14 2024-04-18 Black Diamond Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating cancers using isoquinoline or 6-aza-quinoline derivatives
WO2024129778A2 (en) 2022-12-13 2024-06-20 Juno Therapeutics, Inc. Chimeric antigen receptors specific for baff-r and cd19 and methods and uses thereof
WO2024206858A1 (en) 2023-03-30 2024-10-03 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Compositions for inducing ras gtp hydrolysis and uses thereof
WO2024211712A1 (en) 2023-04-07 2024-10-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Condensed macrocyclic compounds as ras inhibitors
WO2024211663A1 (en) 2023-04-07 2024-10-10 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Condensed macrocyclic compounds as ras inhibitors
WO2024216048A1 (en) 2023-04-14 2024-10-17 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Crystalline forms of ras inhibitors, compositions containing the same, and methods of use thereof
WO2024216016A1 (en) 2023-04-14 2024-10-17 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Crystalline forms of a ras inhibitor
WO2024229406A1 (en) 2023-05-04 2024-11-07 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Combination therapy for a ras related disease or disorder
WO2025034702A1 (en) 2023-08-07 2025-02-13 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Rmc-6291 for use in the treatment of ras protein-related disease or disorder
WO2025080946A2 (en) 2023-10-12 2025-04-17 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Ras inhibitors
WO2025137507A1 (en) 2023-12-22 2025-06-26 Regor Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sos1 inhibitors and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1692318A4 (en) 2008-04-02
WO2005055808A3 (en) 2006-01-26
EP1692318A2 (en) 2006-08-23
JP2007518399A (en) 2007-07-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2005055808A2 (en) Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer
CN1643143B (en) Compositions and methods for detecting, diagnosing and treating hematological malignancies
WO2006078911A2 (en) Gitr antibodies for the diagnosis of nsclc
AU2003210670A1 (en) Compositions and methods for the detection, diagnosis and therapy of hematogolical malignancies
US20020018766A1 (en) Genes differentially expressed in cancer cells to design cancer vaccines
WO1999065928A2 (en) Polynucleotide population isolated from non-metastatic and metastatic breast tumor tissues
WO2001064886A2 (en) Compositions and methods for the detection, diagnosis and therapy of hematological malignancies
US20090304728A1 (en) Tem8 gene, expression forms and diagnostic and therapeutic uses thereof
US20070065889A1 (en) Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer
WO2004091511A2 (en) Compositions and methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer
JP7037147B2 (en) Methods for determining the presence or absence of malignant lymphoma or leukemia, and drugs for the treatment and / or prevention of leukemia
JP2002541805A (en) Compounds for immunotherapy and diagnosis of breast cancer and methods for their use
US20020151515A1 (en) Preparation and use of superior vaccines
CA2335452A1 (en) Preparation and use of superior vaccines
US20030078396A1 (en) Compositions and methods for the detection, diagnosis and therapy of hematological malignancies
WO2006078780A2 (en) Rdc1 antibodies for the diagnosis of nsclc
WO2005000099A2 (en) BLOOD FACTOR DOMAINS (BFDs)
US20060110753A1 (en) Methods to diagnose and treat lung cancer
US20060111297A1 (en) Blood factor domains
US20020082216A1 (en) Compositions and methods for the therapy, diagnosis and monitoring of breast cancer
JP4942906B2 (en) Compositions and methods for treatment and diagnosis of ovarian cancer
WO2005037854A2 (en) Immunogenic peptides
HK1078327B (en) Compositions and methods for the detection, diagnosis and therapy of hematological malignancies
MX2007008691A (en) Gitr antibodies for the diagnosis of nsclc
WO1999066303A2 (en) Identification and use of differentially expressed genes and polynucleotide sequences

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2006542803

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004812984

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: DE

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004812984

Country of ref document: EP